2001 CL Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety.................................................................................................................ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance.....................................................................................................................2
Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................................................51
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features ..............................................................................................121
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving..................................................................................................................................159
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving ..............................................................................................................................................173
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................203
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Appearance Care..............................................................................................................................263
Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your vehicle ever needs body repairs.
Taking Care of the Unexpected......................................................................................................271
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information.....................................................................................................................297
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................309
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)......................................................................................................315
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Owner's Identification Form
The information and specifications
included in this publication were in
effect at the time of approval for
printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice
and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
This Owner’s Manual should be
considered a permanent part of the
car,andshouldremainwiththecar
when it is sold.
This Owner’s Manual covers all
modelsoftheAcura3.2CL.You
may find descriptions of equipment
and features that are not on your
particular model.
Owner’s Identification
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your Acura, other
property, or the environment.
Congratulations ! Your selection of a 2001 Acura 3.2 CL was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to read
this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so you
can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helps
to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When
your car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’s staff is
specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura. Your
Acura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
Introduction
i
−
−
−
−
−
−
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
car safely is an important
responsibility.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your car. You must use
your own good judgement.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
how to use this car correctly and safely.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
These signal words mean:
on the car.
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Instructions
Safety Section
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Your Car at a Glance
2
HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE
HHAANNDDLLEE
AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
SSYYSSTTEEMM
PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWW
SSWWIITTCCHHEESS
DDRRIIVVIINNGG PPOOSSIITTIIOONN
MMEEMMOORRYY
FFUUEELL FFIILLLL DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE
HHAANNDDLLEE
((PP..112222))
((PP..113355))
((PP..116622))
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
((PP..117766))
((PP..116611))
((PP..110033))
PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS
((PP..8811))
DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK
((PP..110077))
TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN
((PP..8866))
MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL
((PP..5533))
((PP..110011))
((PP..111100))
Your Car at a Glance
3
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS
((PP.. 7733))
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS
((PP.. 7711))
HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS
((PP.. 7700))
((PP.. 6688,, 6699))
HHOORRNN
((PP.. 6644))
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR
((PP.. 7700))
RREEMMOOTTEE AAUUDDIIOO CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
((PP.. 115566))
TTIILLTT
AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT
((PP.. 6655,, 6677))
((PP.. 6677))
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
((PP.. 118888,, 119911))
MMOOOONNRROOOOFF SSWWIITTCCHH
((PP.. 110099))
TTRRAACCTTIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL//
VVEEHHIICCLLEE SSTTAABBIILLIITTYY
AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM OONN//
OOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH
4
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains your Supple-
mental Restraint System. And it tells
you how to properly restrain infants
andchildreninyourcar.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
...........................................Airbags . 9
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10
..........................Head Restraints . 10
..................................Door Locks . 10
........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11
............................Protecting Adults . 12
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 15
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 15
....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 17
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 17
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
........................Protecting Children . 20
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 20
Children Should Sit in the Back
...........................................Seat . 21
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks
...........................to Children . 21
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 23
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 23
...Additional Safety Precautions . 23
General Guidelines for Using
...............................Child Seats . 24
.......................Protecting Infants . 28
.........Protecting Small Children . 32
.......Protecting Larger Children . 35
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 39
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 40
..Seat Belt System Components . 40
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 41
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 42
Additional Information About Your
..........................Front Airbags . 43
........................SRS Components . 43
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 43
How the SRS Indicator Light
.......................................Works . 45
Additional Information About Your
............................Side Airbags . 46
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 46
How The Side Airbag Indicator
............................Light Works . 47
Additional Information About Your
.....................................Airbags . 48
.............................Airbag Service . 48
...Additional Safety Precautions . 48
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 49
...................................Safety Labels . 50
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed the greater the
risk, but serious accidents can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal collision.
So even though your car is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and
your passengers always wear your
seat belts, and wear them properly.
(See page .)
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in the back seat,
notthefrontseat.Achildwhoistoo
smallforaseatbeltmustbeproperly
restrained in a child safety seat. (See
page .)
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance. (See page .)
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual. (See page
.)9
15
20
206
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
Keep Your Car in Safe Condition
Restrain All Children
Don’t Drink and Drive
6
Your car is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some safety features do not require
anyactiononyourpart.These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners that
automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
7
((55))
((77))
((66))
((22))
((11))
((99))
((88))
((1100)) ((33))((88))
((22))
((77))
((44))
((66))
((11)) SSaaffeettyy CCaaggee
((22)) CCrruusshh ZZoonneess
((33)) SSeeaattss && SSeeaatt--BBaacckkss
((44)) HHeeaadd RReessttrraaiinnttss
((55)) CCoollllaappssiibbllee SStteeeerriinngg CCoolluummnn
((66)) SSeeaatt BBeellttss
((77)) FFrroonntt AAiirrbbaaggss
((88)) SSiiddee AAiirrbbaaggss
((99)) SSeeaatt BBeelltt TTeennssiioonneerrss
((1100)) DDoooorr LLoocckkss
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Foryoursafety,andthesafetyof
your passengers, your car is
equipped with seat belts in all seating
positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your car has airbags.
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
These safety features are designed
to reduce the severity of injuries in a
crash. However, you and your
passengers can’t take full advantage
of these safety features unless you
remain sitting in a proper position
and
In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
always wear your seat belts
properly.
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Your car also has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Your car has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the car and
against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the car.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
What you should do:
Airbags
9
Keeping your doors locked reduces
thechanceofbeingthrownoutof
the car during a crash. It also helps
prevent occupants from accidentally
opening a door and falling out, and
outsiders from unexpectedly opening
your doors.
Head restraints can help protect you
from whiplash and other injuries. For
maximum protection, the back of
your head should rest against the
center of the head restraint.
Move the front
seats as far back as possible, and
keep adjustable seat-backs in an
upright position whenever the car is
moving.
Your car’s seats are designed to keep
you in a comfortable, upright
position so you can take full
advantage of the protection offered
by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
How you adjust your seats and seat-
backs can also affect your safety. For
example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
increases the risk of you or your
passenger being injured by striking
theinsideofthecar,orbyan
inflating airbag.
Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
the seat belt’s effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seat’s
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force and
speed. So while airbags help save
lives, they can cause minor injuries,
or more serious or even fatal
injuries if occupants are not
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
Door Locks
Head Restraints
Seats & Seat-Backs
What you should do:Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
What you should do:
10
All adults, and children who have
outgrown child safety seats, are
wearing their seat belts and
wearingthemproperly(seepage
).
Any infant or small child is
properly restrained in a child seat
inthebackseat(seepage ).
To make sure you and your
passengers get the maximum
protection from your car’s safety
features, check the following each
time before you drive away:
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.Head restraints are properly
adjusted (see page ).
Frontseatoccupantsaresitting
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page ).
All cargo is properly stored or
secured (see page ).
Seat-backs are upright (see page
).
Both doors are closed and locked
(see page ).
15
20
13
14
15
169
12
Driver and Passenger Safety
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist
Your Car’s Safety Features
11
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver and other adult
occupants.
These instructions also apply to
children who have outgrown child
seats and are large enough to wear
lap/shoulder belts. (See page for
important additional guidelines on
how to properly protect larger
children.)
For security, locked doors can
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors.
For safety, locking the doors reduces
the chance that a passenger,
especially a child, will open a door
while the car is moving and
accidentally fall out. It also reduces
the chance of someone being thrown
out of the car during a crash.
Your car has a door monitor light on
the instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door is not tightly
closed.
After everyone has entered the car,
be sure the doors are closed and
locked.
35
81
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Introduction Close and Lock the Doors1.
12
Most shorter drivers can get far
enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals.
However, if you are concerned about
sitting too close, we recommend that
you investigate whether some type
of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
To reduce the chance of injury, wear
your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat, and
move the seat as far back as possible
from the steering wheel while still
maintaining full control of the car.
Also make sure your front seat
passenger moves the seat as far to
the rear as possible.
Any driver who sits too close to the
steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.
94
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Adjust the Front Seats2.
13
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
See page for how to adjust seat-
backs.
A front passenger should also adjust
the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as
possible. A passenger who sits too
close to the dashboard could be
injured if the front airbag inflates.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
you could be injured if the front
airbag inflates.
95
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
14
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position and sit well
back in the seat.
CONTINUED
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
Before driving, make sure everyone
with an adjustable head restraint has
properly positioned the head
restraint. The restraint should be
positioned so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. A taller
person should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.
98
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Adjust the Head Restraints 5.4.
15
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
See page for additional
information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Anyone using a seat belt that is
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
Acura dealer check the belt as soon
as possible.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack from the
shoulder part, then check that the
belt rests across the center of your
chest and over your shoulder. This
spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper
body.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
40
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
16
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
See page for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
Pointing the steering wheel toward
your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
car is parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured by
striking interior parts of the car, or
by being struck by an inflating front
airbag. Being struck by an inflating
side airbag can result in possibly
serious injuries.
71
CONTINUED
Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6. 7.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Because protecting the mother is the
best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a car.
Pregnant women should also sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard. This will reduce the risk
of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
by a crash or an inflating airbag.
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Remember to keep the lap portion of
the belt as low as possible across
your hips.
Remember, to get the best
protection from your car’s airbags
and other safety features, you must
sit properly and wear your seat belt
properly.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
18
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
If your
hands or arms are close to the
airbag cover in the center of the
steering wheel or on top of the
dashboard, they could be injured if
the front airbags inflate.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
severely compromise the
protective capability of the seat
belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
car and hurt someone.
Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to
protect young passengers. (See page
.)
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be restrained
whenever they ride in a vehicle.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
(See page
.)
So if you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a grandchild or
otherchildreninyourcar,besureto
read this section.
24
35
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Anychildwhoistoosmalltoweara
seat belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat.
A larger child should always be
restrained with a seat belt.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
20
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat, not the front seat. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
In the back seat, children are less
likely to be injured by striking hard
interior parts during a collision or
hard braking. Also, children cannot
be injured by an inflating airbag
when they ride in the back.
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it inflates with tremendous
speed.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
35
CONTINUED
Small Children
Larger Children
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Infants
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your car has
warninglabelsonthedashboardand
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your car has warning labels
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
U.S. Models Canadian Models
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
22
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards from
the passenger’s front airbag, and
paying close attention to a child
distracts the driver from the
important tasks of driving, placing
both of you at risk.
If a child requires physical attention
or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear a seat belt
properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous. For
example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. And
children left alone with the key in
the ignition can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Your car has two seating positions in
the back seat where children can be
properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry more than
twochildreninyourcar:
Children
who play in cars can accidentally
get trapped inside the trunk.
Teach your children not to play in
or around cars. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener (see page ) and decide if
your children should be shown
how to use this feature.
35
17
15
13
86
CONTINUED
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Do not leave children alone in your
vehicle.
Lock all doors and the trunk when
your car is not in use.
23
Childrenuptoaboutone
year old should be restrained in a
rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only
a rear-facing seat provides the
proper support to protect an infant’s
head, neck, and back. See page
for additional information on
protecting infants.
The child seat should
meet Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look
for the manufacturer’s statement
of compliance on the box and seat.
To provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
The following pages give general
guidelines for selecting and installing
child seats for infants and small
children.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the trunk, which can
lead to accidental injury or death.
28
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Infants:
The child seat should meet safety
standards.
Selecting a Child Seat
Keep car keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
1.
2.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats
24
Before purchasing a child seat, we
recommend that parents test the
child seat in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
they intend to use the seat. If a
previously purchased child seat does
not fit, you may need to buy a
different one that will fit.
Due to variations in the design of
child seats, vehicle seats, and seat
belts, all child seats will not fit all
vehicle seating positions.
A child who is too
large for a rear-facing child seat, and
who can sit up without support,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing child seat. See page for
additional information on protecting
small children.
However, Acura is confident that one
or more child seat models can fit and
be properly installed in all
recommended seating positions in
your car.
32
CONTINUED
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Small Children:
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
If a small child must ride in the
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.
This page briefly summarizes Acura’s
recommendations on where to place
rear-facing and forward-facing child
seats in your car.
The passenger’s front airbag
inflates with enough force to kill
or seriously injure an infant in a
rear-facing child seat.
A small child in a forward-facing
child seat is also at risk. If the
vehicle seat is too far forward,
or the child’s head is thrown
forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
Never in the front seat, due
to the front airbag hazard.
Not recommended,
due to the front airbag hazard. If a
small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position and secure a front-
facing child seat with the seat belt
(see page ).
Recommended positions.
Secure a rear-facing child seat
with the seat belt (see page ).
Recommended
positions. Secure a front-facing
child seat with the seat belt (see
page ).
32
28
32
Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat
Infants:
Small children:
Back Seats
Infants:
Small children:
Airbags Pose Serious
Risks to Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
26
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good position to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbethrownoutoftheseatina
crash and be seriously injured.
To provide security during normal
driving maneuvers as well as during
a collision, we recommend that
parents secure a child seat as firmly
as possible.
However, a child seat does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles
or seating positions, it may be
difficult to install a child seat so that
it does not move at all. Some side-to-
side or back-and-forth movement can
be expected and should not reduce
the child seat’s effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured
in the desired seating position.
When you are not using a child seat,
either remove it and store it in a safe
place, or make sure it is properly
secured. An unsecured child seat can
be thrown around the car during a
crash or sudden stop and injure
someone.
All child seats
must be secured to the car with
the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.
A child whose seat is not properly
secured to the car can be
endangered in a crash. See pages
and for instructions on how
to secure child seats in this car.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
29 33
Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.
Storing a Child Seat
Secure the child seat to the car
with a seat belt.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back. Infants up to about
one year of age must be restrained in
a rear-facing child seat.
In this car, a rear-facing child seat
can be placed in any seating position
in the back seat, but not in the front
seat.
We recommend that an infant be
restrained in a rear-facing child seat
until the infant reaches the seat
maker’s weight or height limit and is
able to sit up without support.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If the passenger’s
front airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
forcetokillorseriouslyinjurean
infant. If an infant must be closely
watched, we recommend that
another adult sit in the back seat
with the baby.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
28
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
With the child seat in the desired
back seating position, route the
belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
seats have a locking mechanism that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
The following pages provide
instructions and tips on how to
secure a rear-facing child seat with
this type of seat belt.
1. 2.
3.
CONTINUED
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat, while
pulling up on the belt.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4. 5.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
30
If you are not wearing a seat belt
in a crash, you could be thrown
forward into the dashboard and
crush the infant.
Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the
infantcanbetornfromyourarms
during a crash. For example, if
your car crashes into a parked
vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a
20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a
600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will
notbeabletoholdon.
In either case, we recommend that
you place the child seat directly
behind the front passenger seat,
move the front seat as far forward as
needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or
you may wish to get a smaller child
seat that allows you to safely carry a
front passenger.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front-seat passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended (see page ). Or it
may prevent them from locking the
seat-back in the desired upright
position (see page ).
To achieve the desired reclining
angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the child seat,
as shown.
Forproperprotection,aninfantmust
ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the seat maker’s
recommendations.
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the
infant and cause very serious
injuries.
13
14
Additional Precautions for Infants
Never hold an infant on your lap.
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Tips
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and an infant.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
A child who can sit up without
support, and who fits within the child
seat maker’s weight and height
limits, should be restrained in a
forward-facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child stay in the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
In this car, the best place to install a
forward-facing child seat is in one of
the seating positions in the back seat.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to cause
very serious or fatal injuries. If a
small child must be closely watched,
we recommend that another adult sit
in the back seat with the child.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the car, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
32
Improperly placing a forward-
facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury
or death if the front airbags
inflate.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible and properly restrain
the child.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
and front passenger seating positions
have a locking mechanism that must
be activated to secure a child seat.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a
forward-facing child seat with this
type of seat belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
1. 2.
3.
CONTINUED
Child Seat Installation
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure. It
mayhelptoputweightonthe
child seat, or push on the back of
the seat, while pulling up on the
belt.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism in order to remove a
child seat, unlatch the buckle,
unroute the seat belt, and let the belt
fully retract.
4. 5.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
34
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat and
wear a lap/shoulder belt.
If you are not wearing a seat
belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward into the
dashboard and crush the child.
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause very serious injuries.
Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the
child can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your car crashes into a parked
vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a
30-lb (14 kg) child will become a
900-lb (410 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
If a child is too short for the shoulder
part of the belt to properly fit, we
recommend that the child use a
booster seat until the child is tall
enough to use the seat belt without a
booster.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.
CONTINUED
Protecting Larger Children
Additional Precautions for Small
Children
Never hold a small child on your
lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Allowing a larger child to sit
improperly in the front seat can
result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must sit in front,
make sure the child moves the
seat as far back as possible
and wears the seat belt properly.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
However, if the belt touches or
crosses the child’s neck, the child
needs to use a booster seat.
This could result in
serious neck injuries during a crash.
This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt. Follow the
instructions on page . Then check
how the belt fits.
If the shoulder part of the belt rests
over the child’s collarbone and
against the center of the chest, as
shown, the child is large enough to
wear the seat belt.
15
Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
36
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
The back seat is the safest place for
a child of any age or size.
In addition, the passenger’s front
airbag poses serious risks to children.
If the seat is too far forward, or the
child’s head is thrown forward
during a collision, or the child is
unrestrained or out of position, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
Thesideairbagalsoposesrisks.If
any part of a larger child’s body is in
the path of a deploying airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of the ears are
even with the top of the seat-back. A
child of this height should be tall
enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
without a booster.
Whichever style you select, follow
the booster seat maker’s instructions.
If a child needs a booster seat, we
recommend choosing a style that
allows the child to use the lap/
shoulder belt directly, without a
shield, as shown.
CONTINUED
When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in the
front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit over the hips, chest, and
shoulder (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
the child should not sit in the front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
15 35
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Physical Size
Maturity
38
Since a tether can provide additional
security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
Your car has two tether anchorage
points under the rear window for
securing a tether-style child seat to
the car.
The tether anchorage points are
located under plastic covers. Pivot
the cover backward to access the
anchorage point.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point as shown in
the illustration, then tighten the
strap according to the child seat
maker’s instructions.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Using Child Seats with Tethers
39
CCOOVVEERR
This seat belt has a single belt that
goes over your shoulder, across your
chest and across your hips.
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
Guide the belt across your body to
the door pillar. After exiting the car,
be sure the belt is out of the way and
will not get closed in the door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all seating positions
except the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat. (See
pages and for instructions on
how to secure child seats with this
type of seat belt.)
The seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened before the ignition is turned
ON (II), the light will come on and a
beeper will also sound. The beeper
will stop after a few seconds, but the
light will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all four seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
29 33
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt
40
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
See page for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
properly. For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions.
The tensioners are independent of
the airbag system, so they can be
activated during a collision that
might not cause the airbags to
deploy. In this case, the airbags
would not be needed but the
additional seat belt tension can be
helpful.
The tensioners will be activated in a
collision severe enough to cause the
front airbags to inflate.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page ).
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
way.
45
15
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
41
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
that the lap/shoulder belts retract
easily. Any belt not in good condition
or not working properly will not
provide good protection and should
be replaced as soon as possible.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
you should have your dealer inspect
the belt, and replace it if necessary.
A belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page .
Automatic seat belt tensioners that
deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
Acura provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts. Acura will repair or
replace any seat belt component
that fails to function properly
during normal use. Please see
your
booklet for details.
267
Acura Warranty Information
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
U.S. Models
42
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Your Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) includes:
An indicator light on the
instrument panel that alerts you to
a possible problem with the
system (see page ).
Two front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe frontal
collision.
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your car’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
will detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
front airbags.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is ON (II).
45
41
CONTINUED
SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Front Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
The total time for inflation and
deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
airbags deployed until they see them
lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
For additional information on how
your airbags work, see the booklet
titled
that came with your
owner’s manual.
Since both airbags use the same
sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
This can occur when the severity of
a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
For additional information on how
your airbags work, ask your dealer
for a copy of the booklet titled
During a frontal crash, your seat
belts help restrain your lower body
and torso. Your airbag provides a
cushion to help restrain and protect
your head and chest.
SRS: What You Need to Know
About Airbags
SRS:
What You Need to Know About Airbags
.
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Additional Information About Your Front Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
44
If the light comes on at any other
time, or does not come on at all, you
should have the system checked by
your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator light does not
come on after you turn the ignition
ON (II).
If the light stays on after the
engine starts.
If the light comes on or flashes on
andoffwhileyoudrive.
ThepurposeoftheSRS
indicator light is to alert
you to a potential problem with your
front airbags. This light will also
alert you to a potential problem with
your automatic seat belt tensioners
(page );oryoursideairbagsor
passenger’s side airbag automatic
cutoff system (page ).
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
this indicator will light briefly then
go out. This tells you that the system
is working properly. If you see any of these indications,
your front or side airbags may not
deploy, your passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system may not
work properly, or your seat belt
tensioners may not work when you
need them. See your Acura dealer as
soon as possible.
41
46
Additional Information About Your Front Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the SRS Indicator Light
Works
45
Ignoring the SRS indicator light
can result in serious injury or
death if the airbags, cutoff
system, or tensioners do not
work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
theSRSlightalertsyoutoa
potential problem.
Your car is equipped with side
airbags for the driver and a front
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Additional Information About Your Side Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
46
This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
has been automatically shut off.
If a small-statured adult leans
sideways, or larger adult slouches
and leans sideways into the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system may also shut off the side
airbag.
Although Acura does not encourage
children to ride in the front, to help
prevent injury, your car has an
automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag. This system
is designed to shut off the airbag if a
child leans sideways and the child’s
head is in the deployment path of the
side airbag.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
If the side airbag indicator light
comes on, you should have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the deployment
path of the side airbag, the system
will turn the airbag back on and the
light will go out.
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
the indicator should light briefly and
goout(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’t
light, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your side airbags or
the automatic cutoff system (see
page ).45
56
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Side Airbags
How The Side Airbag Indicator
Light Works
47
Your front and side airbag systems
are virtually maintenance-free, and
there are no parts you can safely
service. However, you must have
your car serviced if:
Any
airbag that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. Do
not try to remove or replace any
airbag by yourself. This must be
done by an Acura dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
Take your car to an
authorized Acura dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
See page for further information
and precautions relating to your
airbags.
Improperly
replacing or covering front seat-
back covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
collision.
If rain or spilled water
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
168
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions
Your airbags ever inflate.
The SRS indicator light alerts you
to a problem.
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting an
Acura dealer.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to water.
Driver and Passenger Safety
48
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
If you must sit in your parked car,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the climate
control system as follows:
Your car’s exhaust contains carbon
monoxide gas. You should have no
problem with carbon monoxide
entering the car in normal driving if
you maintain your car properly.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The car is raised for an oil change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
Thecarwasinanaccidentthat
may have damaged the underside.
Select the Fresh Air mode.
Select the mode.
Set the fan speed to high.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
With the trunk lid open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your car’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk lid open, open all the windows
and set the climate control system as
shown below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your Acura dealer
for a replacement.
U.S. models only
U.S. models Canadian models
Driver and Passenger Safety
Safety Labels
50
RADIATOR CAP
SUN VISOR
HOOD
DASHBOARD
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Acura. All the essential controls
are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 52
...............................Indicator Lights . 53
.............................................Gauges . 60
...............................Speedometer . 60
.................................Tachometer . 60
.....................................Odometer . 61
...................................Trip Meter . 61
Outside Temperature
...................................Indicator . 62
...................Temperature Gauge . 62
..................................Fuel Gauge . 62
Maintenance Required
...................................Indicator . 63
Controls Near the Steering
.......................................Wheel . 64
...................................Headlights . 65
Automatic Lighting Off
.....................................Feature . 66
............Daytime Running Lights . 67
....Instrument Panel Brightness . 67
................................Turn Signals . 67
.....................Windshield Wipers . 68
..................Windshield Washers . 69
..........................Hazard Warning . 70
.............Rear Window Defogger . 70
......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 71
...............Steering Wheel Controls . 73
.............................Cruise Control . 73
.............Remote Audio Controls . 76
...............................Keys and Locks . 77
..............................................Keys . 77
....................Immobilizer System . 78
............................Ignition Switch . 79
......................Power Door Locks . 81
...................Remote Transmitter . 82
...........................................Trunk . 86
....................................Glove Box . 88
......Rear Console Compartment . 88
HomeLink Universal
.................................Transmitter . 89
............................Seat Adjustments . 94
.........Driver’s Seat Adjustments . 94
...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 96
Front Passenger’s Seat
............................Adjustments . 96
........................Rear Seat Access . 97
..........................Head Restraints . 98
............................................Armrest . 99
...........................................Mirrors . 101
..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 101
Driving Position Memory
........................................System . 103
..................................Seat Heaters . 106
............................Power Windows . 107
.......................................Moonroof . 109
...............................Parking Brake . 110
..................................Digital Clock . 110
........................Sunglasses Holder . 111
...........................Beverage Holder . 112
.................Console Compartment . 113
........................................Coin Box . 113
.............................Console Pocket . 114
..................................Storage Tray . 115
......................................Coat Hook . 115
........................................Sun Visor . 116
................................Vanity Mirror . 116
............Accessory Power Sockets . 117
...............................Interior Lights . 118
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
51
Control Locations
Instruments and Controls
52
PPOOWWEERR WWIINNDDOOWW
SSWWIITTCCHHEESS
TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE
BBUUTTTTOONN
HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE
AAUUDDIIOO SSYYSSTTEEMM
((PP.. 8866))
FFUUEELL FFIILLLL
DDOOOORR RREELLEEAASSEE
HHAANNDDLLEE
((PP.. 113355))
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
((PP.. 117766))
((PP.. 116622))
((PP.. 116611))
((PP.. 110077))
((PP.. 8811))
DDIIGGIITTAALL CCLLOOCCKK
((PP.. 111100))
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
((PP.. 112222))
DDRRIIVVIINNGG PPOOSSIITTIIOONN MMEEMMOORRYY
PPOOWWEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS
((PP.. 110033))
MMIIRRRROORR CCOONNTTRROOLLSS
((PP.. 110011))
＊
＊＊
＊＊
The U.S. instrument panel is
shown. Differences for the Canadian
models are noted in the text.
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your car.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Premium model
53
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG
SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTRRAACCTTIIOONN
CCOONNTTRROOLL
SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
DDOOOORR AANNDD TTRRUUNNKK
OOPPEENN MMOONNIITTOORR
LLOOWW FFUUEELL
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
BBRRAAKKEE LLAAMMPP
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEE
SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR
SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP
LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT
SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSEEAATT BBEELLTT
RREEMMIINNDDEERR
LLIIGGHHTT
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDD BBRRAAKKEE
SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
＊
＊＊
＊＊
The U.S. instrument panel is
shown. Differences for the Canadian
models are noted in the text.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to you and your passengers
to protect yourselves by fastening
the seat belts. A beeper also sounds
if you have not fastened your seat
belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the light stays on until
you do. Both the light and the beeper
stay off if you fasten your seat belt
before turning on the ignition.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Seat Belt Reminder Light
Type S
54
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG
SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
LLOOWW FFUUEELL
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
BBRRAAKKEE LLAAMMPP
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSIIDDEE AAIIRRBBAAGG
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
AANNTTII--LLOOCCKK BBRRAAKKEE
SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
IIMMMMOOBBIILLIIZZEERR
SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP
LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT
SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
VVSSAA
AACCTTIIVVAATTIIOONN
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
DDOOOORR AANNDD
TTRRUUNNKK OOPPEENN
MMOONNIITTOORR
VVEEHHIICCLLEE SSTTAABBIILLIITTYY AASSSSIISSTT
SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSEEAATT BBEELLTT
RREEMMIINNDDEERR
LLIIGGHHTT
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE AANNDD BBRRAAKKEE
SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
The engine can be severely damaged
if this light flashes or stays on when
the engine is running. For complete
information, see page .
If this light comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For complete
information, see page .
This light has two functions:
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch ON (II) as a
reminder to check the parking
brake. If the parking brake is not
set, it goes off after the engine
starts. If the parking brake is set,
it goes off when you release the
parking brake with the engine
running. Driving with the parking
brake applied can damage the
brakes and tires.
If the indicator remains lit after
you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page .
See page .
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If this light comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
theABS.Ifthishappens,takethe
cartoyourdealertohaveitchecked.
With the light on, your car still has
normal braking ability but no anti-
lock. For complete information, see
page .
1.
2.
284
285
287
187
286
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
55
U.S. Canada U.S. Canada
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
This lights when you set the cruise
control. See page for information
on operating the cruise control.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This light will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system
or automatic seat belt tensioners.
For complete information, see page
.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For complete information, see page
.47
45
78
73
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Side Airbag Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
56
If this light comes on and stays on at
any other time, or it does not come
on when you turn the ignition switch
ON (II), there is a problem with the
VSA system. Take the car to your
dealer to have it checked. Without
VSA, your car still has normal
driving ability, but will not have VSA
traction and stability enhancement.
See page for more information
on the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II).
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). See page
for more information on the
VSA system.
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the Vehicle
Stability Assist (VSA) system.
This indicator has three functions: This indicator has three functions:
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the Traction
Control System.
It flashes when the TCS is
regulating wheelspin.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonwhen
the Traction Control System is on,
it indicates that there is a problem
in the TCS.
This light also comes on when you
turn the ignition ON (II) and goes off
after the engine starts. See page
for more information on the
TCS.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
191
191
191
188
On Premium modelOn Type SOn Type S
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
VSA Activation Indicator Traction Control System
(TCS) Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
57
This light comes on with the high
beam headlights. See page for
information on the headlight
controls.
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are on (see page ).
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) with
the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
youturnontheheadlightsorrelease
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
The left or right turn signal light
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the light does not blink or
blinks rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signalling.
WhenyouturnontheHazard
Warning switch, both turn signal
lights blink. All turn signals on the
outside of the car should flash.
The appropriate light comes on in
this display if the trunk or either
door is not closed tightly with the
ignition switch ON (II).
255
65
67
Canadian models only
High Beam Indicator
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Door and Trunk Open Monitor
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
58
This light comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
If a brake light does not work, the
indicator comes on
when you push the brake pedal with
the ignition switch ON (II).
A burned out brake light is a hazard
when drivers behind you cannot tell
you are braking. Have your brake
lights repaired right away.
This light comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this light come on
(see page ).227
Canadian models only
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Low Fuel Indicator
Brake Lamp Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
59
BRAKE LAMP
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
Tachometer
60
TTAACCHHOOMMEETTEERR TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE
GGAAUUGGEE
SSEELLEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
OODDOOMMEETTEERR
RREESSEETT
BBUUTTTTOONN
FFUUEELL GGAAUUGGEE
MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE
RREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSPPEEEEDDOOMMEETTEERR
OOUUTTSSIIDDEE TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTRRIIPP MMEETTEERR
The odometer shows the total dis-
tance your car has been driven. It
measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
The trip meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the Select
button repeatedly. Each trip meter
works independently, so you can
keep track of two different distances.
When you turn the ignition switch
ON (II), what you last selected is
displayed. To reset a trip meter, display it and
then press and hold the Reset button
until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’. You
will hear a beep. Both trip meters
will reset if the car’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Odometer Trip Meter
61
SSEELLEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
RREESSEETT
BBUUTTTTOONN
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.
models, and in Centigrade in
Canadian models.
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
The temperature sensor is located in
the front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road sur-
face, engine heat, and the exhaust
from the surrounding traffic. This
can cause the temperature reading
not to be correct when your speed is
under 19 mph (30 km/h).
This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the car is on
level ground. It may show slightly
more or less than the actual amount
whenyouaredrivingoncurvyor
hilly roads.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom mark to about the
middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to near
the upper red mark. If it reaches the
red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
The needle returns to the bottom
after you turn off the ignition. The
gauge shows the fuel level reading
immediately after you turn the
ignition switch back ON (II).
282
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Fuel GaugeTemperature GaugeOutside Temperature Indicator
62
−
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Acura dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
Turn off the engine.
For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II).
Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and
7,500 miles (12,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
Press and hold the select and reset
buttons next to the instrument pan-
el, then turn the ignition switch
ON (II).
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules
for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on pages .
Hold the buttons for
approximately ten seconds until
the indicator resets.
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your car in for
scheduled maintenance.
If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
1.
2.
3.
208 212
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Maintenance Required Indicator
63
SSEELLEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
RREESSEETT
BBUUTTTTOONN
MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE RREEQQUUIIRREEDD IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
＊＊
＊
Thetwoleversonthesteering
column contain controls for driving
features you use most often. The left
lever controls the turn signals,
headlights, and high beams. The
right lever controls the windshield
washers and wipers.
The switch for the hazard warning
lights is on the dashboard to the
right of the steering column.
The tilt adjustment lever on the
underside of the steering column
allows you to tilt the steering wheel.
The controls under the left air vent
are for the moonroof, cruise control
and the VSA/TCS.
To use the horn, press the pad
around the ‘‘A’’ logo.
:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
64
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL
BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS
TTIILLTT AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT
HHOORRNN
MMOOOONNRROOOOFF
SSWWIITTCCHH
TTRRAACCTTIIOONN
CCOONNTTRROOLL//VVEEHHIICCLLEE
SSTTAABBIILLIITTYY AASSSSIISSTT
SSYYSSTTEEMM OONN//OOFFFF
SSWWIITTCCHH
HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTTSS//
TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALLSS
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD
WWIIPPEERRSS//WWAASSHHEERRSS
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW
DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR
CCRRUUIISSEE
CCOONNTTRROOLL
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG
LLIIGGHHTTSS
CONTINUED
To change between low beams and
high beams, pull the turn signal lever
until you hear a click, then let go.
The blue high beam indicator will
light (see page ).
The rotating switch on the left lever
controls the lights. Turning this
switch to the position turns on
the parking lights, taillights, side
marker lights, and rear license plate
lights. Turning the switch to the
position turns on the
headlights.
If you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0), you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.
Whenyouturnontheheadlights
(low or high beam), the road lamps
in the front bumper will also come on.
58
Headlights
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
65
The high beams will stay on for as
long as you hold the lever back, no
matter what position the headlight
switch is in.
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off.
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
The Automatic Lighting Off feature
turns off the headlights, road lamps,
parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate lights and
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds of removing the key from
the ignition switch and closing the
driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’
or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,
open, then close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights will turn off
after ten minutes.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
66
Signal a turn or lane change with this
lever. Push down on the lever to
signal a left turn, and up to signal a
right turn. If you push it up or down
all the way, the turn signal continues
to blink even when you release the
lever. It shuts off automatically as
you complete the turn.
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
The dial on the dashboard to the left
of the instrument panel is used to
adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel lights. Turn the dial
to adjust the brightness.
CONTINUED
Turn SignalsInstrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights
(Canadian Models)
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
67
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL
BBRRIIGGHHTTNNEESSSS DDIIAALL
TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLEEVVEERR
The right lever controls the wind-
shield wipers and washers. The
rotary switch at the end of the lever
has three positions:
INT: intermittent
: low speed
: high speed
In intermittent, the wipers operate
every few seconds. The sweep
interval will change slightly with
speed; getting shorter as you drive
faster. In low speed and high speed,
the wipers run continuously.
To signal a lane change, push lightly
on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the center position as soon
as you release it.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Windshield Wipers
68
To operate the wipers in mist mode,
push the control lever down. The
wipers run at high speed until you
release the lever. This gives you a
quick way to clear the windshield.
You can vary how often the wipers
sweep the windshield by turning the
INT TIME ring next to the rotary
switch.
If you turn the INT TIME ring to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
change from intermittent to low
speed operation when vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
To clean the windshield, pull back on
the wiper control lever. The washers
spray until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed while you’re
pulling the lever, then complete one
more sweep of the windshield after
you release it.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Windshield Washers
69
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The light in the
button lights to show the defogger is
on. If you do not turn it off, the
defogger will shut itself off after
about25minutes.Italsoshutsoff
when you turn off the ignition. You
have to turn it on again when you
restart the car.
Pushtheredbuttontoturnonthe
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your car
is disabled.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger
70
CCaarrss wwiitthh nnaavviiggaattiioonn ssyysstteemm
CONTINUED
See page for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
17
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment
71
CCaarrss wwiitthh nnaavviiggaattiioonn ssyysstteemm
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
car and be seriously injured in a
crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the car is stopped.
To adjust the steering wheel upward
or downward:
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Move the steering wheel to the
desired position, making sure the
wheel points toward your chest,
not toward your face. Make sure
you can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
72
CONTINUED
Push in the Cruise Control Master
Switch to the left of the steering
column. The indicator in the
switch will light.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain, or bad weather. You should
have full control of the car under
those conditions.
1.
2.
Instruments and Controls
Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Steering Wheel Controls
73
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL MMAASSTTEERR SSWWIITTCCHH
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Press and release the SET/decel
buttononthesteeringwheel.The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
RESUME/accel button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RESUME/
accel button. The car will acceler-
ate. When you reach the desired
cruising speed, release the button.
Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-
celerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the SET/decel
button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RESUME/
accel button repeatedly. Each time
you do this, your car will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
3.
Steering Wheel Controls
Instruments and Controls
Changing the Set Speed
74
CCAANNCCEELL
SSEETT//ddeecceell
RREESSUUMMEE//
aacccceell
CONTINUED
Youcancancelthecruisecontrolin
any of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Press the Cruise Control Master
Switch.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/decel
button. The car will decelerate.
Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the car slows to the desired
speed, press the SET/decel button.
The car will then maintain the
desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/decel
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your car will slow down
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The car
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
will cause the cruise control to
cancel.
Cancelling the Cruise Control
Steering Wheel Controls
Instruments and Controls
75
CCAANNCCEELL
BBUUTTTTOONN
These buttons let you control some
functions of the audio system with-
out removing your hands from the
wheel. Refer to page for a com-
plete explanation.
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
Switch turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed from memory. To use the
system again, refer to
.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISE
CONTROL light on the instrument
panel will go out and the car will
begin to slow down. You can use the
accelerator pedal in the normal way.
The system remembers the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
and release the RESUME/accel
button. The CRUISE CONTROL
light comes on, and the car will
accelerate to the same cruising
speed as before.
156
Remote Audio Controls
Steering Wheel Controls
Instruments and Controls
Using the
Cruise Control
76
AAUUDDIIOO//CCHH
BBUUTTTTOONN
Your car comes with two master
keys and a valet key.
The master key fits all the locks on
your car:
• Ignition
• Doors
• Trunk pass-through cover
•Glovebox
• Rear console compartment
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the door locks. You can
keep the trunk pass-through cover,
glove box, and rear console
compartment locked when you leave
your car and the valet key at a
parking facility.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number plate with your keys. You
will need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Keep
the plate stored in a safe place. If you
need to replace a key, use only an
Acura-approved key blank.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them immedi-
ately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
CONTINUED
Keys
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
77
VVAALLEETT KKEEYY
((GGrraayy))
MMAASSTTEERR
KKEEYYSS
((BBllaacckk))
KKEEYY NNUUMMBBEERR PPLLAATTEE
Your car also comes with two remote
transmitters; see page for an
explanation of the operation.
The Immobilizer System protects
your car from theft. A properly-
coded master or valet key must be
used in the ignition switch for the
engine to start. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the
ignition switch when you insert the
key. To make sure the system
recognizes the key code:
Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
Use a plastic or leather key fob,
not metal.
Keep other keys away from your
car’s key and the ignition switch
while trying to start the engine.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Acura dealer.
82
Remote Transmitter
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Immobilizer System
78
This indicator will also blink several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your car undriveable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
Acura dealer.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
•LOCK(0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
CONTINUED
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Ignition Switch
79
−−
−
−
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To switch from ACCESSORY to
LOCK, you must push the key in
slightly as you turn it. The shift lever
must also be in Park. The anti-theft
lock will lock the steering column
when you remove the key.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from
LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn
the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
In this position,
you can operate the audio system
and the accessory power sockets.
This is the normal key
position when driving. All features
and accessories on the car are usable.
Several of the lights on the instru-
ment panel come on as a test when
you turn the ignition switch from
ACCESSORY to ON.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not
recognize the key’s coding (see page
).
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
thedriver’sdoor.Removethekeyto
turn off the beeper.
78
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
LOCK (0) ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
80
CONTINUED
Each door has a master door lock
switch. Either switch locks and
unlocks both doors. Push the switch
down to lock both doors and up to
unlock them.
Each door has a lock tab at the top of
the door. When you push down the
lock tab on the driver’s door, both
doors lock. Pulling up the lock tab on
the driver’s door only unlocks that
door. The lock tab on the passenger’s
door only locks and unlocks that
door.
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the car, push the lock
tab down and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, remove the key
from the ignition switch and push
the lock tab down or push the master
switch down, then close the door.
Both doors can be locked from the
outsidebyusingthekeyineither
door.
To unlock only the driver’s door
from the outside, insert the key in
the driver’s door lock, turn the key
and release it. If you turn the key
and hold it, both doors will unlock.
Both doors will unlock when you
unlock the passenger’s door with the
key.
Power Door Locks
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
81
MMAASSTTEERR DDOOOORR LLOOCCKK SSWWIITTCCHH LLOOCCKK TTAABB
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, Lockout Prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With the driver’s door open
andthekeyintheignition,both
master door lock switches are
disabled. However, if the driver’s
door is not open, the master door
lock switches are not disabled.
Pushing the switch down on the
open passenger’s door will lock both
doors. If you try to lock an open
driver’s door by pushing down the
lock tab, the tabs on both doors pop
up. Pushing down the lock tab on the
passenger’s door only locks that door.
You can lock and unlock your car
with the remote transmitter. When
you push the LOCK button, both
doors lock. The parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and license
plate light will flash once.
When you push the LOCK button a
second time within 5 seconds after
you have locked the doors, you will
hear a beep to verify that the
security system will be set.
When you push the UNLOCK button
once, only the driver’s door unlocks.
The passenger’s door unlocks when
you push the button a second time.
The parking lights, side marker
lights, taillights and license plate
light flash twice each time you push
the button.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
either door, the light stays on for
about 10 seconds, then fades out. If
you relock the doors with the remote
transmitter before 10 seconds have
elapsed, the light will go off
immediately.
If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open
either door within 30 seconds, the
doors automatically relock and the
security system sets.
Remote Transmitter
Lockout Prevention
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
82
LLEEDD
UUNNLLOOCCKK
BBUUTTTTOONN
LLOOCCKK
BBUUTTTTOONN
TTRRUUNNKK
RREELLEEAASSEE
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPAANNIICC
BBUUTTTTOONN
CONTINUED
To open the trunk, push the Trunk
Release button for approximately
one second.
You can open the trunk with the
remote transmitter regardless of the
position of the main switch in the
glove box. The trunk will not open if
the key is in the ignition switch.
You cannot lock the doors with the
remote transmitter if either door is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch. You cannot unlock
the doors with the key in the ignition
switch.
If the seat and mirrors are already in
the proper positions, you will hear
three beeps when you open the door.
Theremotetransmitterswillalso
activate the Driving Position
Memory System (see page ).
When you open the driver’s door
after unlocking it with the remote
transmitter, you will hear a beep.
The driver’s seat and outside mirrors
move to the positions stored in that
memory location. You will hear two
beeps when the movement is
complete.
The driving position memory
activated (Memory 1, Memory 2) is
shownonthebackofeach
transmitter. Make sure you store
your desired driving position in the
memory that is activated by the
transmitter you normally carry.
You can turn off this driving position
memory activation. While standing
near the car, press and hold the
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the
same time. The LED in the remote
transmitter will blink twice. Then
release the buttons.
To turn it back on, repeat this
procedure. The LED will come on
for one second to indicate the
feature has been turned on.
103
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Recalling a Memorized Driving
Position
83
WWiitthh MMeemmoorryy 11
WWiitthh MMeemmoorryy 22
＋
Panic mode allows you to remotely
activate your car’s security system to
attract attention. When activated, the
horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash, for about 30 seconds.
To activate panic mode, press and
hold the PANIC button for about two
seconds.
To cancel Panic mode before 30
seconds, press any button on the
remote transmitter. You can also
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Panic mode will not activate if the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
When the remote transmitter’s
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors, and the
LED will get dim. Replace the
battery as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR2025
To replace the battery, remove the
round cover on the back of the trans-
mitter by turning it counterclockwise
with a coin.
Remove the old battery and note the
polarity. Make sure the polarity of
the new battery is the same ( side
facing up), then insert it in the
transmitter.
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Panic Mode Replacing the Battery
84
CClloossee
OOppeenn
RROOUUNNDD
CCOOVVEERR
BBAATTTTEERRYY
▽
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Clean the transmitter case with a
soft cloth. Do not use strong
cleaners or solvents that could harm
the case. Immersing the transmitter
in any liquid will harm the trans-
mitter and cause it to not function
properly.
Avoid severe shock to the trans-
mitter, such as dropping or throwing
it. Also, protect it from extreme hot
or cold temperatures.
If you lose a transmitter, you will
need to have the replacement
programmed to your car’s system by
your Acura dealer. Any other
transmitters you have will also need
to be reprogrammed.
Align the mark on the cover
with the mark on the
transmitter, then set the cover in
place and turn it clockwise.
Instruments and Controls
Keys and Locks
Transmitter Care
85
Youcanopenthetrunkinthree
ways:
Press the trunk release button on
the driver’s door.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter
for approximately one second (see
page ).
Reach through the trunk pass-
through and pull the trunk release
handle.
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
See page for cargo loading and
weight limit information. Keep the
trunk lid closed at all times while
driving to avoid damaging the lid,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
As a safety feature, your car has a
release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
To open the trunk, push the release
lever to the left.
169
49
82
U.S. models only
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Trunk
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
Emergency Trunk Opener
86
TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN
TTRRUUNNKK RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE
Even if the trunk main switch is
turned off, you can open the trunk
with the remote transmitter.
Lock the glove box with the
master key.
Give the person the valet key.
Make sure the trunk pass-through
cover is locked (see page ).
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
For more information about child
safety, see page .
Disable the trunk release button
on the driver’s door by turning off
the trunk main switch in the glove
box.
To protect items in the trunk when
you need to give the key to someone
else:
1.
2.
3.
4.
100
23
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
87
TTRRUUNNKK MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHH
The glove box light comes on only
when the parking lights are on.
Open the glove box by squeezing the
handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the master key. To open the rear console
compartment, pull up on the lever
and lift the lid. To close, lower the lid
and push it down until it latches.
The rear console compartment can
be locked and unlocked only with the
master key.
The rear console compartment is
located in the center of the rear seat.
Glove Box Rear Console Compartment
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
88
RREEAARR CCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
GGLLOOVVEE
BBOOXX
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
The HomeLink Universal
Transmitter built into your car can
be programmed to operate remotely-
controlled devices around your home,
such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems. It can
replaceuptothreeremote
transmitters.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal
Transmitter, or would like
information on home products that
can be operated by the transmitter,
call (800) 355-3515. On the Internet,
go to www.homelink.jci.com.
Always refer to the operating
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with the HomeLink
Universal Transmitter. If you do not
have this information, you should
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
While training or using the
transmitter, make sure you have a
clear view of the garage door or gate,
and that no one will be injured by its
movement. If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program the
HomeLink Universal Transmitter to
operate it. Garage door openers
manufactured before that date do
not have a safety feature that causes
them to stop and reverse if an
obstacle is detected during closing,
increasing the risk of injury. If you
have questions, call (800) 355-3515.
If you are training the transmitter to
operate a garage door or gate, it is
recommended that you unplug the
motor for that device during training.
Repeatedly pressing the remote
control button could burn out the
motor.
The HomeLink transmitter stores
the code in a permanent memory.
There should be no need to retrain
the transmitter if your car’s battery
goes dead or is disconnected.
Customer Assistance
Important Safety Precautions General Information
HomeLink Universal Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
89
−
Before you can use the HomeLink
Universal Transmitter to operate
devices around your home, it must
‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. For
example, to train the transmitter to
open and close the garage door:
Select the transmitter button you
want to train.
Press the button on the remote
control and the button on the
transmitter at the same time. Hold
down both buttons.
If you just took
delivery of your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in the
HomeLink transmitter before, you
should erase any previously learned
codes before training the first button.
Todothis,pressandholdthetwo
outside buttons on the HomeLink
transmitter for about 20 seconds
until the red light flashes. Release
the buttons, then proceed to Step 1.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to Step 1.
Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the house current.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote control 2 to 5
inches from the HomeLink
transmitter. Make sure you are
not blocking your view of the red
light in the transmitter.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Training the Transmitter
HomeLink Universal Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
Before you begin
90
Canadian Owners:
The remote control you are training
from may stop transmitting after two
seconds. This is not long enough for
the HomeLink transmitter to learn
thecode.Releaseandpressthe
button on the remote control every
two seconds until the transmitter has
learned the code.
The red light in the transmitter
should begin flashing. It will flash
slowly at first, then rapidly.
When the red light flashes rapidly,
release both buttons. The
transmitter should have learned
the code from the remote control.
Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the transmitter
button by pushing it. It should
operate the garage door.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before the
HomeLink transmitter can operate
the garage door opener.
The‘‘Training the Transmitter’’
procedure trains the HomeLink
transmitter to the proper garage
door opener code. The following
procedure synchronizes the
HomeLink transmitter to the garage
door opener so they send and
receive the correct codes.
If the button does not work, repeat
this procedure to train it again. If it
still does not work, you may have a
variable or rolling code garage
door opener. Test this by pressing
and holding the HomeLink
transmitter button you just trained.
If the red light blinks for two
seconds,thenstayson,youhavea
rolling code garage door opener.
You may be able to verify this with
the manufacturer’s documentation.
Go to ‘‘Training With a Rolling
Code System.’’
Repeat these steps to train the
other two transmitter buttons to
operate any other remotely-
controlled devices around your
home (lighting, automatic gate,
security system, etc.).
5.
6.
7.
8.
CONTINUED
Training With a Rolling Code
System
HomeLink Universal Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
91
Itmaybehelpfultohavesomeone
assist you with this procedure.
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training the
Transmitter’’ procedure.
Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer. The
manufacturer’s documentation
may help.
Press the Training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
light next to the button comes on,
then release it. The light may blink,
or come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
Press and release the button on
the HomeLink transmitter. (The
same button you trained with the
‘‘Training the Transmitter’’
procedure.)
Press and release the HomeLink
transmitter button again. This
should turn off the training light
on the garage door opener unit.
(Some systems may require you to
press and release the button up to
three times.)
Press the transmitter button again.
It should operate the garage door.
6.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
HomeLink Universal Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
92
TTRRAAIINNIINNGG
BBUUTTTTOONN
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red light
begins to flash, then release the
buttons.
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the car.
Totrainanalreadyprogrammed
transmitter button to operate a new
device:
Select the transmitter button you
want to train.
Press and hold the transmitter
button until the red light begins to
flash slowly (approximately 20
seconds).
While continuing to hold the
transmitter button, place the
remotecontrolforthedevice2to
5 inches from the HomeLink
transmitter.
Press and hold the button on the
remote control. Hold both buttons
until the red light begins to flash
rapidly.
Release both buttons. The
transmitter should now be trained
to operate the device.
1.
3.
2.
4.
5.
Erasing Codes
Retraining a Button
HomeLink Universal Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
93
−
Pull up or push down on the front of
the switch to move the seat bottom’s
front edge up or down. Pull up or
push down on the rear of the switch
to move the rear of the seat bottom
up or down.Push the horizontal switch forward
or backward to move the seat
forward or backward.
The long horizontal switch adjusts
the seat bottom in several directions.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat-back angle.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
Your Acura has power adjustable
driver’s seat. The two power seat
adjustment switches are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. The
front passenger’s seat is also power-
adjustable.
You can adjust the power seats with
the ignition switch in any position.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
1413
Driver’s Seat Adjustments
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
94
Pull the center of the horizontal
switch up to raise the seat. Push it
down to lower the seat.
Adjust the seat-back angle by
pushing the rear switch in the
direction you want to move.
The driver’s seat includes a memory
feature. Two seat positions can be
stored in separate memories. You
canthenselectamemorizedposition
by pushing the appropriate memory
button or using the remote
transmitter. Refer to page for
how to memorize and select seat
positions.
103
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
95
−
The seat adjustment switches are on
the outside edge of the seat bottom.
Push the long horizontal switch
forward or backward to move the
seat bottom in that direction.
Adjust the seat-back angle by
pushing the vertical switch in the
direction you want to move.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
Vary the lumbar support by moving
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back. Move the lever forward or
backward to adjust the lumbar
support through its full range.
You can adjust the seat with the
ignition switch in any position.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
13
14
Driver’s Lumbar Support Front Passenger’s Seat
Adjustments
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
96
To get into the rear seat, open the
door and pull the release lever up on
thesideoftheseat-back.Theseat-
back will tilt forward and the entire
seat will move forward to allow
easier entry to the rear seat.
After you return the seat-back to the
upright position, the seat bottom will
automatically return to its original
position.
If the seat runs into any obstacle,
such as a large package on the floor
between the front and rear seats
while it is moving back to its original
position, the seat will stop and move
forward slightly.
Remove the obstacle, then move the
seat to the desired position with the
adjustment switch.
To move the driver’s seat, you can
select the memorized position with
the memory button.
Sitting down heavily in the seat as it
is moving backward can also cause
the seat to react as if it has run into
an obstacle.
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
Rear Seat Access
97
RREELLEEAASSEE LLEEVVEERR
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
15
The front head restraints help
protect you and your passenger from
whiplash and other injuries. They are
most effective when you adjust them
so the back of the occupant’s head
rests against the center of the
restraint. A taller person should
adjust the restraint as high as
possible. The front head restraints adjust for
height. You need both hands to
adjust the restraint. Do not attempt
to adjust it while driving. To raise it,
pull upward. To lower the restraint,
push the release button sideways
and push the restraint down.
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button
and pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
Head Restraints
98
RREELLEEAASSEE BBUUTTTTOONN
CONTINUED
The lid of the console compartment
canbeusedasanarmrestbymoving
it forward and backward. Make sure
the armrest is securely latched.
The rear seat armrest is located at
the center of the rear seat. Pivot it
down to use it.
Make sure the passengers’ hands or
fingersareawayfromthearmrest
before moving it.
Armrest
Instruments and Controls
99
The pass-through cover can be
opened from either side; it folds
forward onto the center armrest.
Open the cover by sliding the knob
downward and pushing or pulling on
the cover. To close the cover, swing
it up and push firmly on the top.
Make sure it latches properly.
Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the pass-
through are secured.
For security, this cover can be
locked and unlocked only with the
master key. To lock the cover, insert
thekeyandturnitclockwise.
Never drive with this cover open and
the trunk lid open.
See on
page .49
Armrest
Instruments and Controls
Trunk Pass-through Cover
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
100
KKNNOOBB
CCOOVVEERR
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this sensing.
Adjust the outside mirrors with the
adjustment switch on the driver’s
door armrest:
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
101
AAUUTTOO SSWWIITTCCHH
SSEENNSSOORR
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
SSEELLEECCTTOORR SSWWIITTCCHH
The outside mirrors are heated to re-
move fog and frost. With the ignition
switchON(II),turnontheheaters
by pressing the button. The light in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up or down.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
Outside mirror positions can be
stored in the driving position
memory system (see page ).
With the selector switch in the
center (off) position, the passenger’s
side mirror will pivot downward
slightly when you shift the
transmission into reverse. This will
give you a better view of that side of
the vehicle while parallel parking.
The mirror returns to its original
position when you take the
transmission out of reverse.
4.
3.
103
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
102
HHEEAATTEEDD MMIIRRRROORR BBUUTTTTOONN
AADDJJUUSSTTMMEENNTT SSWWIITTCCHH
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
You cannot add a new driving
position in the memory unless the
ignition switch is ON (II). You can
recall a memorized position with
the ignition switch in any position.
Store a driving position as explained
in this section only when the car is
parked.
Your Acura has a memory feature
for the driver’s seat and outside
mirror positions.
Two seat and outside mirror
positions, for different drivers or
drivingconditions,canbestoredin
separate memories. You select a
memorized position by pushing the
appropriate button or using the
appropriate remote transmitter
(Memory1orMemory2).
Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page ). Press and release the MEMO
buttononthecontrolpanel.You
will hear a beep. Immediately
press and hold one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two
beeps. The indicator light in the
memory button will come on. The
current positions of the driver’s
seat and outside mirrors are now
stored.
Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page ).
3.
1.
2.
94
101
CONTINUED
Storing a Driving Position in Memory
Driving Position Memory System
Instruments and Controls
103
MMEEMMOO BBUUTTTTOONN
Doing any of the following after
pressing the MEMO button will
cancel the storing procedure.
Not pressing a memory button
within 5 seconds.
You can select memorized positions
as follows.
Make sure the parking brake is set
and the shift lever is in Park.
Readjusting the seat position.
Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then
release the button.
The system will move the seat and
outside mirrors to the memorized
positions. The indicator light in the
selected memory button will flash
during movement. When the
adjustments are complete, you will
hear two beeps and the indicator
light will remain on.
Readjusting the outside mirror
position.
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory. If
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.
All stored driving positions will be
lost if your car’s battery goes dead or
is disconnected.
1.
2.
Selecting a Memorized Position
Driving Position Memory System
Instruments and Controls
104
MMEEMMOORRYY BBUUTTTTOONNSS
Press any button on the control
panel: MEMO, 1 or 2.
To stop the system’s automatic ad-
justment;
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat.
If desired, you can use the
adjustment switches to change the
positions of the seat or outside
mirrors after they are in their
memorized position. If you change
the memorized position, the
indicator light in the memory button
will go out. To keep this driving
position for later use, you must store
it in the driving position memory.
Shift out of Park.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
Driving Position Memory System
Instruments and Controls
105
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly. Select the LO
setting when the seats feel warm.
The HI setting draws large
amounts of current from the
battery.
Do not use the seat heaters, even
on the LO setting, if the engine is
left idling for an extended period.
They can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
The HI or LO indicator lights and
remains lit until you turn it off by
pushing the opposite side of the
switch lightly. The indicator will turn
off.
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops. It
continues to cycle as long as you
leave it set on HI. The HI indicator
remains lit as a reminder that you
have the heater on.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Because of the sensors for the side
airbag system, there is no heater in
the passenger’s seat-back.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The ignition switch
must be ON (II) to use them. Push
the front of the switch, HI, to rapidly
heat up the seat. After the seat
reaches a comfortable temperature,
select LO by pushing the back of the
switch. This will keep the seat warm.
Seat Heaters
Instruments and Controls
106
SSEEAATT HHEEAATTEERRSS
Each door has a switch that controls
its window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
Your car’s windows are electrically-
powered. Turn the ignition switch to
ON(II)toraiseorloweranywindow.
The driver’s armrest has a master
power window control panel. To
open the passenger’s window, push
down on the switch and hold it down
until the window reaches the desired
position. To close the window, pull
back on the window switch. Release
the switch when the window gets to
the position you want.
CONTINUED
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
107
MMAAIINN SSWWIITTCCHH
DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS WWIINNDDOOWW SSWWIITTCCHH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
−
The master control panel also con-
tains these extra features:
To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down and release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way down. To stop the window
from going all the way down, pull
back on the window switch briefly.
To open the driver’s window only
partially, push the window switch
down lightly and hold it. The window
will stop as soon as you release the
switch.
The AUTO function only works to
lower the driver’s window. To raise
the window, you must pull back on
the window switch and hold it until
the window reaches the desired
position.
The MAIN switch controls power to
the passenger’s window. With this
switch off, the passenger’s window
cannot be raised or lowered. The
MAIN switch does not affect the
driver’s window. Keep the MAIN
switch off when you have children in
the car so they do not injure
themselves by operating the window
unintentionally. The lights inside the
switches come on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
The power window system has a key-
off delay function. The windows will
stilloperateforuptotenminutes
after you turn off the ignition.
Opening either door cancels the
delay function. You must turn the
ignition switch ON (II) again before
you can raise or lower the windows.
Instruments and Controls
AUTO
Power Windows
108
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can be slid back into
the roof. Use the switch under the
left dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be ON (II).
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center button
( ). To close the moonroof,
press and hold the top of the switch
( ). To open the moonroof,
press and hold the bottom of the
switch ( ). Release the switch
when the moonroof gets to the
desired position. Make sure
everyone’s hands are away from the
moonroof before opening or closing
it.
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can still open and close the
moonroof for up to ten minutes after
you turn off the ignition. The key-off
delay cancels as soon as you open
either door. You must then turn the
ignition ON (II) for the moonroof to
operate.
Moonroof
Instruments and Controls
109
MMOOOONNRROOOOFF SSWWIITTCCHH
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
To apply the parking brake, push the
parking brake pedal down with your
foot. To release the parking brake,
push on the pedal again. The parking
brake light on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released with the
engine running. (see page .)
The digital clock displays the time
with the ignition switch in any
position.
To set the clock:
Press and hold the H button until
the hour advances to the desired
time.
1.55
3.2 CL without Navigation System
Parking Brake Digital Clock
Parking Brake, Digital Clock
Instruments and Controls
110
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE PPEEDDAALL
HH MM
RR
Driving the car with the parking brake
applied can damage the rear brakes
and axles.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. It will unlatch and
swing down. To close it, push it until
it latches. Make sure the holder is
closed while you are driving.
Press and hold the M button until
the numbers advance to the
desired time.
You can use R to quickly set the time
to the nearest hour. If the displayed
time is before the half hour, pressing
Rsetstheclockbacktotheprevious
hour. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, pressing R sets the
clock forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
2.
Digital Clock, Sunglasses Holder
Instruments and Controls
Sunglasses Holder
111
PPuusshh
SSUUNNGGLLAASSSSEESS HHOOLLDDEERR
The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the center armrest. To use
it, pivot the armrest down.
To open the beverage holder, push
on the button. The beverage holder
lid is spring-loaded and will
swing open. To close it, push either
half of the lid closed.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holder. A spilled liquid that
is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can also
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
The inner liner can be removed if
youwanttoholdalargercup.
Beverage Holder
Instruments and Controls
112
IINNNNEERR
LLIINNEERR
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the left lever and lift the
lid.
To close, lower the lid and push it
down until it latches.
Youcanputsmallitemsinthetray
located in the console compartment
lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
right lever and lift up the armrest
pad.
The coin box is located under the
audio system. To open the coin box,
pull the bottom edge. Close it with a
firm push.
The console compartment light
comesononlywhentheparking
lights are on.
Coin BoxConsole Compartment
Instruments and Controls
113
LLEEVVEERR
CCOOIINN BBOOXX
CCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
LLEEVVEERR
To open the console pocket, swing
the upper edge of the lid down.
To remove this pocket, open it, then
take it out of its hinges by lifting it
up and out. Do not try to pull the
pocket out forcibly. You could
damage it.
Console Pocket
Instruments and Controls
114
CCOONNSSOOLLEE PPOOCCKKEETT
The storage tray is located above the
audio system. Push on the center of
the tray to get it to pop out. Then
remove it by pulling it straight out.
Youcanputawritingpad,pen,and
small items in the inner box in the
storagetray.Liftthelidtousethe
tray.
To use a coat hook, push on the lid.
Close it with a firm push.
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
To reinstall the storage tray into the
dashboard, close the lid, then push
the storage tray in until it latches.
3.2 CL without Navigation System
Storage Tray, Coat Hook
Storage Tray Coat Hook
Instruments and Controls
115
SSTTOORRAAGGEE TTRRAAYY
LLIIDD
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
You can also use the sun visor at the
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun
visor toward the side window. In this
position, the sun visor can be
extended by sliding out the
extension.
Touseavanitymirroronthebackof
the sun visor, pull up the cover.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the car. Do not use the
sun visor extension over the rear
view mirror.
The lights beside the mirror come
on only when the parking lights are
on.
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
Instruments and Controls
116
EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN
Your car has two accessory power
sockets. One is located on the front
panel next to the coin box, and the
other is in the console compartment.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
To open the socket on the front
panel, pull the cover down.
Tousethesocketintheconsole
compartment, pull the cover up.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
They will not power an automotive
type cigarette lighter element.
Accessory Power Sockets
Instruments and Controls
117
AACCCCEESSSSOORRYY PPOOWWEERR SSOOCCKKEETT
AACCCCEESSSSOORRYY PPOOWWEERR SSOOCCKKEETT
CCOOVVEERR
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 10 seconds.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) also comes on
when you unlock the door with the
remote transmitter (see page ). If
you relock the door, the light turns
off immediately. Otherwise, it
remainson,thenfadesoutinabout
10 seconds.The ceiling light has a three-position
switch. In the OFF position, the light
does not come on. In the center
position, the ceiling light comes on
when you open either door. The light
fades out after both doors are closed.
In the ON position, the ceiling light
stays on continuously.
Turn on the spotlights by pushing
the button next to each light. Push
the button again to turn it off. You
can use the spotlights at all times.
82
Instruments and Controls
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light Spotlights
118
DDOOOORR AACCTTIIVVAATTEEDD
OONN
OOFFFF
The courtesy light in each door
comes on when the door is opened,
and goes out when the door is closed.
Your car also has a courtesy light in
the ignition switch. This light comes
on when you open the driver’s door.
It remains on for several seconds
after the door is closed.
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
Courtesy Lights
119
120
The standard audio system has
many features. This section de-
scribes those features and how to
use them.
The climate control system in your
Acura provides a comfortable driving
environment in all weather condi-
tions.
Your Acura has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to dis-
courage vandalism and theft of your
Acura.
...............Climate Control System . 122
.......Fully-automatic Operation . 124
.......Semi-automatic Operation . 125
.......Fully-automatic Operation . 129
.......Semi-automatic Operation . 130
Sunlight Sensor/
............Temperature Sensor . 134
................................Audio System . 135
.................Operating the Radio . 136
.................Adjusting the Sound . 139
............Audio System Lighting . 140
....................Radio Frequencies . 140
........................Radio Reception . 140
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 142
............Tape Search Functions . 143
Caring for the Cassette
.....................................Player . 146
.....Operating the CD Changer . 147
..Loading CDs in the Changer . 148
...................................Operation . 150
Removing CDs from the
.................................Changer . 152
.......Protecting Compact Discs . 154
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 155
...........Remote Audio Controls . 156
.......................Theft Protection . 157
............................Security System . 158
3.2 CL without Navigation System
3.2 CL with Navigation System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Comfort and Convenience Features
121
The automatic climate control
system in your Acura picks the
proper combination of air condi-
tioning, heating, and ventilation to
maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and air flow levels.
The direction of air flow from the
vents in the center and each side of
the dashboard is adjustable. Move
the tab in the center of each vent up-
and-down and side-to-side.
The climate control system draws air
through the exterior vents at the
bottom of the windshield. Keep
these vents clear of leaves and other
debris.
For the climate control system to
provide heating and cooling, the
engine must be running.
Thesideventscanbeopenedand
closed with the dials underneath
them.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Climate Control System
122
OOppeenn
CClloossee
CCEENNTTEERR VVEENNTT DDRRIIVVEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
123
PPAASSSSEENNGGEERR’’SS--SSIIDDEE VVEENNTT
OOppeenn
CClloossee
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. Keep the system completely off
only for short periods. To keep stale
air and mustiness from collecting,
you should have the fan running at
all times.
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button and set the
fan control dial to AUTO, then set
the desired temperature by turning
the temperature control dial. You will
see FULL AUTO in the system’s
display. The light in the
buttonalsoshowsyouwhich
mode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, is
selected.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper
limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs
at full cooling or heating only. It does
not regulate the interior temperature.
When the temperature is set
between the lower and upper limits,
the system regulates the interior
temperature to the set value.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Fully-automatic Operation
3.2 CL without Navigation System
124
FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALLFFUULLLL AAUUTTOO
DDIISSPPLLAAYY
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE
CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
OOFFFF BBUUTTTTOONNAAUUTTOO BBUUTTTTOONN
CONTINUED
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain auto-
matically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
FULL to go out.
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the sys-
tem cannot regulate the inside tem-
perature if you set the dial below the
outside temperature. With the A/C
on, use the temperature control dial
to adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator in this button is lit, air
from the car’s interior is sent
through the system again
(Recirculation mode). When the
indicator is off, air is brought in from
outside the car (Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Semi-automatic Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button
125
RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG BBUUTTTTOONNTTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE
CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALL
You can manually select the fan
speedbyturningthefancontroldial.
When you turn the dial clockwise,
the fan is taken out of automatic
mode and starts to run at its lowest
speed. Turning the dial fully
clockwise increases the fan’s speed,
which increases air flow.
Use the MODE button to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the side vents and the
dashboard corner vents in all modes.
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode
selected. Press the button four times
to see all the modes.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Fan Control Dial
Mode Button
126
FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL DDIIAALLMMOODDEE BBUUTTTTOONN
CONTINUED
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and de-
froster vents at the base of the wind-
shield.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
127
The button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you select , the A/C
turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. If
thefancontroldialisinAUTO,the
fan speed increases automatically. If
it is not in AUTO, manually increase
the fan speed or set the dial to
AUTO. You can increase air flow to
thewindshieldbyclosingtheside
vents in the dashboard.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).70
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Window Defogger Button
128
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN
▲
▼
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button. The
indicator in the button will light.
Then set the desired temperature by
pressing either side of the TEMP
button: to raise the temperature
above the displayed value, or to
lower the temperature. The light in
the button also shows you
which mode, Recirculation or Fresh
Air, is selected.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper
limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs
at full cooling or heating only. It does
not regulate the interior temperature.
When the temperature is set
between the lower and upper limits,
the system regulates the interior
temperature to the set value.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. Keep the system completely off
only for short periods. To keep stale
air and mustiness from collecting,
you should have the fan running at
all times.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Fully-automatic Operation
3.2 CL with Navigation System
129
OOFFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
AAUUTTOO BBUUTTTTOONN
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE BBUUTTTTOONN
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE DDIISSPPLLAAYY
RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain
automatically controlled. Some of
these functions appear in the
Navigation System display. Press the
A/C button next to the display to
show these functions. Making any
manual selection causes the
indicator in the AUTO button to go
out.
Pressing ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ in the
display turns the air conditioning on
andoff.YouwillseeA/CONorA/C
OFF activated in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set it below the
outside temperature. With the A/C
off, use the temperature buttons to
adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
Semi-automatic Operation
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
A/C (Air Conditioning) On/Off Icons
130
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE BBUUTTTTOONN
AA//CC OONN//OOFFFF IICCOONNSS
AA//CC BBUUTTTTOONN
RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN
CONTINUED
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator in this button is lit, air
from the car’s interior is sent
through the system again
(Recirculation mode). When the
indicator is off, air is brought in from
outside the car (Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing any of the fan
control icons.
Use the MODE icons to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents and the side vents in all modes.
Recirculation Button
Fan Control Icons
Mode Icons
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
131
RREECCIIRRCCUULLAATTIIOONN BBUUTTTTOONN
FFAANN CCOONNTTRROOLL IICCOONNSS
MMOODDEE IICCOONNSS
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and de-
froster vents at the base of the wind-
shield.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
132
The button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you select , the A/C
turns on automatically, the system
selects Fresh Air mode, and the fan
speed increases. You can increase air
flow to the windshield by closing the
side vents in the dashboard.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).70
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Window Defogger Button
133
RREEAARR WWIINNDDOOWW DDEEFFOOGGGGEERR BBUUTTTTOONN
DDEEFFRROOSSTTEERR BBUUTTTTOONN
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is located
in the top of the dashboard and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
134
TTEEMMPPEERRAATTUURREE SSEENNSSOORRSSUUNNLLIIGGHHTT SSEENNSSOORR
＊
＊
Your Acura’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The cassette system features Dolby
B noise reduction, automatic
sensing of chromium-dioxide (CrO )
tape, and autoreverse for continuous
play.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
car’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).
The in-dash CD changer holds up to
six discs. You operate the CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. See page for CD
changer operation. 157
147
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM/Cassette/CD Changer
Audio System
135
−
−
○○
−
−＋
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob right or left until the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pressing the PWR/
VOL knob or the AM or FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broad-
castinginstereo.Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
You can use any of four methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or the
Preset buttons.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
either SEEK button ( or ), then
release it. Depending on which
SEEK button you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. When the system is
in the SCAN mode, SCAN shows in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
TUNE
Operating the Radio
SEEK
SCAN
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
136
−
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Use the TUNE or SEEK function
to tune the radio to a desired
station.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
To store a frequency:
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Preset
137
PPWWRR//VVOOLL
KKNNOOBB
SSTTEERREEOO
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBB
SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSSPPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
FFMM
BBUUTTTTOONN
AAMM
BBUUTTTTOONN
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
AUTO SELECT
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
138
SSEEEEKK BBUUTTTTOONNSS
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBAA..SSEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
AA..SSEELL
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPRREESSEETT
BBUUTTTTOONNSS
SSCCAANN BBUUTTTTOONN
−
−
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The level
indicators on the display show you
the range.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob. The level indicators on
the display show you the range.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Adjusting the Sound
Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
139
TTUUNNEE KKNNOOBBLLEEVVEELL IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the il-
lumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Your Acura’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
How well your Acura’s radio receives
stations is dependent on many
factors, such as the distance from
the station’s transmitter, nearby
large objects, and atmospheric
conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
67
Audio System Lighting
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
140
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
141
▲
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the button.
Dolby remains off until you turn it on
by pressing the button again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
You can remove the cassette with
the ignition switch in any position,
even if the audio system is turned off.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
To switch to the radio or CD
changer while listening to a tape,
presstheAM,FMorCDbutton.To
change back to the cassette player,
press the TAPE button.
Operating the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
142
−
CONTINUED
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
Fast Forward and
Rewind move the tape rapidly. To
rewind the tape, push the REW
button. You will see REW in the
display. To fast forward the tape,
push the FF button. You will see FF
displayed. Press the FF, REW or
PLAY button to take the system out
of rewind or fast forward. When the
system reaches the end of the tape,
it reverses direction and begins to
play.
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
143
DDOOLLBBYY IINNDDIICCAATTOORRPPWWRR//VVOOLL KKNNOOBB
AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN
TTAAPPEE DDIIRREECCTTIIOONN
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
CCAASSSSEETTTTEE SSLLOOTT
TTAAPPEE EEJJEECCTT
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPLLAAYY
BBUUTTTTOONN
PPRROOGG
BBUUTTTTOONN
DDOOLLBBYY BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN
FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
TTAAPPEE
BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONNFFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
−
○
○
○○
−
＋
−＋
The SKIP function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To skip to the beginning
of a song or passage currently
playing, push the button. You will
see REW flashing in the display as
thetaperewinds.Toskiptothe
beginning of the next song, push the
button. You will see FF flashing in
the display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the begin-
ning of a song or passage, it goes
back to PLAY.
To stop the SKIP function before it
finds the beginning of a song or
passage, press either of the SKIP
buttons ( or ).
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
SKIP
144
SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSSRRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEPPEEAATT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
FFFF BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEWW BBUUTTTTOONN
− The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
Pressing the REW or FF button, or
either of the SKIP buttons, also turns
off REPEAT.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
145
The cassette player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This contami-
nation builds up over time and
causes the sound quality to degrade.
To prevent this, you should clean the
player after every 30 hours of use.
Your dealer has a cleaning kit
available.
If you do not clean the cassette
player regularly, it may eventually
become impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit.
Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.
Cassettes longer than that use
thinner tape that may break or jam
the drive.
Look at the cassette before you
insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten
it by turning a hub with a pencil or
your finger.
If the label is peeling off, remove it
from the cassette or it could cause
the cassette to jam in the player.
Never try to insert a warped or
damaged cassette in the player.
When they are not in use, store
cassettes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place cassettes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a cassette is
exposed to extreme heat or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature
before inserting it in the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the cassette player.
If you see the error indication
‘‘ ’’ on the display, press the
EJECT button to remove the
cassette from the unit. Make sure
the tape is not damaged. If the
cassette will not eject or the error
indication stays on after the cassette
ejects, take the car to your Acura
dealer.
Caring for the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
146
CONTINUED
Your Acura’s audio system has an in-
dash CD changer that holds up to six
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio and
cassette player.
To load the CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be
in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Load and play only standard round
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in
the drive or cause other problems.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Changer
147
SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSSCCDD BBUUTTTTOONNRRDDMM BBUUTTTTOONN
RREEPPEEAATT BBUUTTTTOONN
LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN CCDD EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN
PPWWRR//VVOOLL
KKNNOOBB
CCDD SSLLOOTT
To load multiple CDs in one
operation:
Press and hold the Load button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘____’’inthedisplay,then
release the button.
On the left side of the display, the
CD Loaded indicator for an empty
position will begin blinking.
When LOAd appears again in the
display, insert the next disc into
the CD slot.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last CD loaded.
If you are not loading CDs into all six
positions, press the Load button
again after the last CD has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
last CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, and you do not
press the Load button, the system
will wait for ten seconds, then stop
the load operation and begin playing
the last CD loaded.
To load a single CD:
Press and release the Load button.
When the CD Loaded indicator for
an empty position starts to blink,
andyouseeLOAdinthedisplay,
insert the disc into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway, the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way.
The system will load the CD, and
begin playing it.When you see LOAd in the display,
insert the disc into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway, the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will again see the dashes
in the display as the CD is loaded.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Loading CDs in the Changer
148
CONTINUED
If you press the Load button while a
CD is playing, the system will stop
playing that CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate preset
button. Select an empty position (the
CD Loaded indicator is off), and
press the preset button for that
position (1 to 6). The system will
stop playing the current CD and start
the loading sequence. It will then
play the CD just loaded.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
149
LLOOAADD BBUUTTTTOONN
AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS
CCDD SSLLOOTTFFMM
BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD LLOOAADDEEDD
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
TTAAPPEE BBUUTTTTOONN
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
＋
−
＋
−
Select the CD changer by pressing
the CD button. You will see ‘‘Cd’’ in
the display. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
CD changer. You will see the disc
and track numbers displayed.
When that disc ends, the next disc in
the CD changer is loaded and played.
After the last disc finishes, the
system returns to disc 1.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate Preset button (1 6). If
youselectanemptypositioninthe
CD changer, the system will go into
the loading sequence (see page ).
You can use the SKIP buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display as a reminder. The system
continuously replays the current
track. Press the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing either of the
SKIP buttons also turns off the
repeat feature.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks
within a CD in random order, rather
than in the order they are recorded
on the CD. To activate Random Play,
presstheRDMbutton.Youwillsee
RDM in the display. The system will
then select and play tracks randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM
button again, or you select a
different CD with a preset button.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the appropriate SKIP
button. You will hear a beep and the
system will continue to move. Press
the button to move forward, or
the button to move backward.
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.
Each time you press the button
and release it, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track. Press and release the
buttontoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track. Press
and release it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
148
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operation
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
150
CONTINUED
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM or FM button, or insert
a cassette in the player. If a tape is
already in the cassette player, press
the TAPE button. When you return
to CD mode by pressing the CD
button, play will continue at the same
point that it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will
continue at the same point when you
turn it back on.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
151
PPRREESSEETT BBUUTTTTOONNSS SSKKIIPP BBUUTTTTOONNSSRRPPTT BBUUTTTTOONN RRDDMM
BBUUTTTTOONN
RRDDMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
RRPPTT
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
PPWWRR//VVOOLL
KKNNOOBB
AAMM BBUUTTTTOONN FFMM BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD
BBUUTTTTOONN
TTAAPPEE
BBUUTTTTOONN
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the Eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. When
you remove the disc from the slot,
the system automatically begins the
Load sequence so you can load
another CD in that position. If you do
not load another CD, after ten
seconds the system begins playing
the next disc in the changer. If the
changer is empty, the system selects
the previous mode (AM, FM, or
Tape).
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after ten seconds and begin
playing it.
To remove a different CD from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset button. When that
CD begins playing, press the Eject
button.
Removing CDs from the Changer
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
152
CCDD BBUUTTTTOONN
CCDD EEJJEECCTT BBUUTTTTOONN CCDD SSLLOOTT
If you press the Eject button while
listening to the radio or tape, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the Eject button again will eject the
next disc in the numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the CDs from the changer.
In any mode, if you press the Eject
button and hold it until you hear a
beep, the system will eject all of the
discs in the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first. You
can eject up to five discs, one at a
time.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
153
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
AnewCDmayberoughonthe
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the disc, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, felt-tip
pens, and labels can cause the CD to
not play properly, or possibly jam in
the drive.
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
154
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Acura dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
Disc-changer
malfunction.
High temperature.
Disc-changer
malfunction.
High temperature.
Misconnection or
disconnection of
optional trunk-mounted
CD changer.
No CD magazine in the
optional trunk-mounted
CD changer.
No CD in magazine.
Consult your Acura dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Consult your Acura dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
See your Acura dealer.
Insert a CD magazine.
Insert a CD in magazine.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
155
▲▼
Two controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The top and bottom buttons adjust
thevolumeup( )ordown( ).
Press the proper button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
The AUDIO/CH button has three
functions, depending on whether you
are listening to the radio, or playing a
cassette or CD.
If you are playing a cassette, use the
AUDIO/CH button to advance to the
next selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’
blinking in the display when you
press the AUDIO/CH button. The
system fast forwards until it senses a
silent period, then goes back to
PLAY.
IfyouareplayingaCD,thesystem
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you push the
AUDIO/CH button. You will see the
disc and track number in the display.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the AUDIO/CH button to change
stations. Each time you press this
button, the system advances to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. You will see the
number of the selected Preset button
in the display. To change bands,
press the AM or FM button on the
audio system’s front panel.
Remote Audio Controls
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
156
AAUUDDIIOO//CCHH
BBUUTTTTOONN
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the Preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when
power was disconnected.
Your car’s audio system will disable
itself if it is disconnected from
electrical power for any reason. To
make it work again, the user must
enter a specific five-digit code in the
Preset buttons. Because there are
hundreds of number combinations
possible from five digits, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code
number and serial number. It is best
tostorethiscardinasafeplaceat
home. In addition, you should write
the audio system’s serial number in
this Owner’s Manual. If you should
happen to lose the card, you must
obtain the code number from your
Acura dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, or the radio fuse is
removed, the audio system will
disable itself. If this happens, you
will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display the next time you turn on the
system. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code. If it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over or try to
correct your mistake. Complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
Theft Protection
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
157
The security system helps to protect
your car and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
carorremovetheradio.Thisalarm
continues for two minutes, then the
system resets. To reset an alarming
system before the two minutes have
elapsed, unlock either door with the
key or the remote transmitter.
The security system sets auto-
matically fifteen seconds after you
lock the doors, hood, and trunk. For
the system to activate, you must lock
the doors from the outside with the
key, lock tab, door lock switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system light on the driver’s door
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.
Once the security system is set,
opening either door (without using
the key or the remote transmitter),
or the hood, will cause it to alarm. It
also alarms if the radio is removed
from the dashboard or the wiring is
cut.
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter without triggering the
alarm. The alarm will sound if the
trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
opened with the trunk release button
on the driver’s door or the trunk
release handle behind the trunk
pass-through cover.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or either door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door and Trunk Open
Monitor on the instrument panel
(see page ), to see if the doors
and trunk are fully closed. Since it is
notpartofthemonitordisplay,
manually check the hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
58
Security System
Comfort and Convenience Features
158
SSEECCUURRIITTYY SSYYSSTTEEMM LLIIGGHHTT
Before you begin driving your Acura,
youshouldknowwhatgasolineto
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your car,
please read the information in this
section first.
.............................Break-in Period . 160
.........................................Gasoline . 160
.........Service Station Procedures . 161
................Filling the Fuel Tank . 161
....................Opening the Hood . 162
...............................Oil Check . 163
.........Engine Coolant Check . 165
...............................Fuel Economy . 166
............................Car Condition . 166
...........................Driving Habits . 166
...Accessories and Modifications . 167
.............................Carrying Cargo . 169
Before Driving
Before Driving
159
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoidhardbraking.Newbrakes
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 200 miles (300
km).
Youshouldfollowthesesamere-
commendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are relined.
Your Acura is designed to operate on
premium unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane number of 91 or higher.
In Canada, some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
MMT. If you use such gasolines,
your emissions control system
performance may deteriorate and
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on.
If this happens, contact your
authorized Acura dealer for service.
Help assure your car’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Useofaloweroctanegasolinecan
cause occasional metallic knocking
noises in the engine and will result in
decreased engine performance.
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
Using gasoline containing lead will
damage your car’s emissions
controls. This contributes to air
pollution.
Break-in Period, Gasoline
Before Driving
Break-in Period Gasoline
160
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
Removethefuelfillcapslowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Because the fuel fill cap is on the
driver’s side of the car, park with
that side closest to the service
station pumps.
Your car has an on-board refueling
vapor recovery system to help
keep fuel vapors from going into
the atmosphere. If the fuel pump
keeps clicking off even though the
tank is not full, there may be a
problem with this system. Consult
your dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Filling the Fuel Tank
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
161
FFUUEELL FFIILLLL CCAAPP
PPuullll
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Shift to Park or Neutral and set
the parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
tighten it until it clicks several
times. If you do not properly
tighten the cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp may come on (see
page ).
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Standing in front of the car, reach
in between the hood and the front
bumper with your finger. The
hood latch handle is under the ‘‘A’’
logo. Slide the latch handle to the
right.
1. 2.
5.
6.
286
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Opening the Hood
162
HHOOOODD RREELLEEAASSEE HHAANNDDLLEE
LLAATTCCHH HHAANNDDLLEE
CONTINUED
If you can open the hood without
sliding the hood latch handle, or the
hood latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page ).
Check the engine oil level every time
you fill the car with fuel. Wait a few
minutes after turning the engine off
before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
uptherestofthewayandholdit
up.
To close the hood, lower it to about a
foot (30 cm) above the fender, then
press down firmly with your hands.
Afterclosingthehood,makesureit
is securely latched.
1.
3.
231
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Oil Check
163
DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Insert it all the way back in its tube.Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
4.
217
3.2.
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Adding Oil
164
UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK
DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
on checking other items in your
Acura.
221
215
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Engine Coolant Check
Adding
Engine Coolant
Owner Maintenance
Checks
165
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK
MMIINN
MMAAXX
A cold engine uses more fuel than a
warm engine. It is not necessary to
‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
idle for a long time. You can drive
away in about a minute, no matter
how cold it is outside. The engine
will warm up faster, and you get
better fuel economy. To cut down on
the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
You can improve fuel economy by
driving moderately. Rapid acceler-
ation, abrupt cornering, and hard
braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear that
allows the engine to run and acceler-
ate smoothly.
An important part of that mainte-
nance is the
(see page ). For
example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. It also wears out
faster, so check the tire pressure at
least monthly.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.TurnofftheA/Cor
set the climate control to a higher
temperature to cut down on air
conditioning use. Use the flow-
through ventilation when the outside
air temperature is moderate.
The condition of your car and your
driving habits are the two most
important things that affect the fuel
mileage you get.
Always maintain your car according
to the maintenance schedule. This
will keep it in top operating condition.
In winter, the build-up of snow on
your car’s underside adds weight and
rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning
helps your fuel mileage and reduces
thechanceofcorrosion.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
to maintain a constant speed. Every
time you slow down and speed up,
your car uses extra fuel. Use the
cruise control, when appropriate, to
increase fuel economy.
215
Driving Habits
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Car Condition
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
166
Modifying your car, or installing
some non-Acura accessories, can
make your car unsafe. Before you
make any modifications or add any
accessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
Your dealer has Genuine Acura
accessories that allow you to
personalize your car. These
accessories have been designed and
approved for your car, and are
covered by warranty.
Non-Acura accessories are usually
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your car, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your car’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on the page for
additional information.)
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your car’s
computer-controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
If possible, have your dealer inspect
the final installation.
Have the installer contact your
Acura dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ).
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper car operation or
performance.
Before installing any accessory:
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your car’s electrical system capacity,
they can interfere with the operation
of your car, or even cause the
airbags to deploy.
168
289
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
167
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
car’s handling, stability and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Do not remove any original
equipment or modify your car in any
way that would alter its design or
operation. This could make your car
unsafe and illegal to drive.
Such modifications can adversely
affect handling, and interfere with
the operation of the car’s anti-lock
brakes and other systems.
Covering the outside edge of a
front seat-back, with a non-Acura
seat cover for example, could
prevent the airbag from inflating
properly.
For example, do not make any
modifications that would change the
ride height of your car, or install
wheels and tires with a different
overall diameter.
In addition, any modifications that
decrease ground clearance increase
the chance of undercarriage parts
striking a curb, speed bump, or other
raised object, which could cause
your airbags to deploy.
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
car and hurt someone.
Modifications
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not place any objects over the
outsideedgeofafrontseat-back.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
168
＊＊
＊＊
Your car has several convenient
storage areas so you can stow cargo
safely.
The glove box, and the pockets in
the doors and seat-backs, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The trunk is intended for larger,
heavier items.
In addition, the trunk pass-through
allows you to carry longer items.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your car’s handling, stability and
operation and make it unsafe. Before
carrying any type of cargo, be sure to
read the following pages.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
169
TTRRUUNNKK
:: 33..22 CCLL wwiitthhoouutt NNaavviiggaattiioonn SSyysstteemm
SSEEAATT--BBAACCKK PPOOCCKKEETTSS
GGLLOOVVEE BBOOXX
SSTTOORRAAGGEE TTRRAAYYDDOOOORR PPOOCCKKEETTCCOONNSSOOLLEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
RREEAARR CCOONNSSOOLLEE
CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
CCOONNSSOOLLEE PPOOCCKKEETT
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Besureitemsplacedonthefloor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, or with the proper
operation of the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If the lid is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
viewandbethrownaroundthecar
during a crash.
The final number is the total weight
of cargo you can carry.
If you are towing a trailer, add the
tongue weight to the number
above.
Add up the weight of all occupants.
To figure out how much cargo you
can carry:
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, accessories,
and the tongue weight if you are
towing a trailer.
The maximum load for your car is
700 lbs (325 kg).
Subtract the total from 700 lbs
(325 kg).
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Load Limit
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
170
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page .
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
If you can carry any items on a
roofrack,besurethetotalweight
of the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your Acura
dealer for further information.
The cargo net can be used to help
hold down items stored in the trunk.
To use the cargo net, hook it to the
buttons on the floor and sides of the
trunk. You can use the cargo net in
several configurations by hooking it
to different buttons.
When you are not using the cargo
net, store it in the pocket in the left
side of the trunk.
49
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Rack
Cargo Net
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
171
TTRRUUNNKK NNEETT HHOOOOKK
CCAARRGGOO NNEETT
172
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your car, the braking system,
the Traction Control System, the
Vehicle Stability Assist System, and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 174
.......................Starting the Engine . 175
Starting in Cold Weather
....................at High Altitude . 175
..............Automatic Transmission . 176
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 176
................Shift Lever Positions . 177
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 182
....................Shift Lock Release . 183
...........................................Parking . 184
.....................The Braking System . 185
.............Brake Wear Indicators . 185
...............Brake System Design . 186
.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 186
Important Safety
.........................Reminders . 187
........................ABS Indicator . 187
..............Traction Control System . 188
...Vehicle Stability Assist System . 191
...............Driving in Bad Weather . 194
...........................Towing a Trailer . 196
Driving
Driving
173
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood and trunk are
fully closed.
Check the adjustment of the seat
(see page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
steering wheel (see page ).
Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Check the indicator lights in the
instrument panel.
Start the engine (see page ).
Check the gauges and indicator
lights in the instrument panel (see
page ).
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your car.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
71 53
15
94
101
175
10.
11.
12.
Preparing to Drive
Driving
174
Push the accelerator pedal half-
way to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in START
(III) for more than 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal gradually as
the engine speeds up and smooths
out.
If the engine fails to start in step 2,
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor and hold it there while you
try to start the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, return to step 2.
If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
starting in order to clear flooding.
As before, keep the ignition key in
the START (III) position for no
more than 15 seconds. Return to
step 5 if the engine does not start.
If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
An engine is harder to start in cold
weather. The thinner air found at
high altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to the problem.
Use the following procedure:
Turn off all electrical accessories
to reduce the drain on the battery.
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. If the engine
does not start right away, do not
hold the key in START (III) for
more than 15 seconds at a time.
Pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed half-way
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
Starting in Cold Weather at High
Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/
2,400 meters)
Driving
Starting the Engine
175
Your Acura’s transmission has five
forward speeds, and is electronically
controlled for smoother shifting. It
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter
forbetterfueleconomy.Youmay
feel what seems like another shift
when the converter locks.
This indicator in the tachometer
shows which position the shift lever
is in. The illuminated number next to
the ‘‘D ’’ indicator shows you the
gear you have selected in the
Sequential SportShift mode.
The ‘‘D ’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes
while driving (in any shift position),
it indicates a possible problem in the
transmission. Avoid rapid
acceleration and have the
transmission checked by an
authorized Acura dealer as soon as
possible.
5
5
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Shift Lever Position Indicator
176
CONTINUED
The shift lever has nine positions. It
must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D,D,D,2,1,N,R,orthe
Sequential SportShift mode, press
firmly on the brake pedal and keep
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
To select the Sequential SportShift
mode, slide the shift lever toward the
left from the ‘‘D ’’ position.
In this mode the shift lever allows
youtoshiftupanddownmanually.
YoucannotshiftoutofParkwiththe
brake pedal depressed when the
ignition switch is in LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I).
Whenever you move the shift lever,
slide it along the guide on the
console.
543
5
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoN
NtoD
DtoD
DtoD
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoD
DtoN
NtoR
RtoP
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, then
move the shift lever.
Move the lever.
5
54
43
3
3
34
45
5
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Shift Lever Positions
177
SSHHIIFFTT LLEEVVEERR
SSEEQQUUEENNTTIIAALL
SSPPOORRTTSSHHIIFFTT
MMOODDEE
PPOOSSIITTIIOONN
− −
−−
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Move the shift
lever to the right to shift out of the
Park position.
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. The shift lever must be in
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
To shift to Reverse
from Park, see the explanation under
Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop and
then shift.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
.
Your car has a reverse lockout so
you cannot accidentally shift to
Reverse from Neutral or any other
driving position when the vehicle
speed exceeds 7 9 mph (12 14
km/h).
If you cannot shift to Reverse when
the car is stopped, press the brake
pedal and slowly shift to Neutral, and
then to Reverse.
If there is a problem in the reverse
lockout system, or your car’s battery
is disconnected or goes dead, you
cannot shift to Reverse. (Refer to
Shift Lock Release on page ).
183
183
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Park (P) Reverse (R)
178
−
−
−
＋＋
−−
CONTINUED
Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to Park posi-
tion if you need to leave the car for
any reason. Press on the brake pedal
when you are moving the shift lever
from Neutral to another gear.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear for your speed and
acceleration. You may notice the
transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
With
the shift lever in ‘‘D ’’ position, you
can select the Sequential SportShift
mode to shift gears; much like a
manual transmission, but without a
clutch pedal.
Even with the Sequential SportShift
Mode selected, the transmission will
automatically upshift and downshift
between first and second gear.
To enter the Sequential SportShift
mode, move the shift lever to the left.
To return to ‘‘D ’’, move the shift
lever to the right.
When you move the shift lever from
‘‘D ’’ to the Sequential SportShift
mode, the display shows the selected
gear.
In the Sequential SportShift mode,
each time you push forward on the
shift lever, the transmission shifts to
a higher gear. Pull back on the lever
to downshift. The number of the
gear selected is displayed next to the
‘‘D ’’ indicator (see page ).176
5
5
5
5
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Neutral (N)
Drive (D )
5
Sequential SportShift Mode
179
DDoowwnnsshhiifftt
UUppsshhiifftt
→
→
→
→
When you accelerate away from a
stop, the transmission will start in
first gear and then automatically
upshift to second gear. You have to
manually upshift between second
and fifth gears. Make sure you
upshift before the engine speed
reaches the tachometer’s red zone.
The transmission remains in the
selected gear (5, 4, 3). There is no
automatic downshift when you push
the accelerator pedal to the floor.
The transmission may automatically
downshift from the higher gear to
the lower gear under the following
conditions:
To shift from
43
54
Speed range
under 18 mph
(29 km/h)
under 34 mph
(55 km/h)
To shift from
43
54
Speed range
under 34 mph
(55 km/h)
under 47 mph
(75 km/h)
Downshifting gives you more power
when climbing or provides engine
brakingwhengoingdownasteephill.
The transmission will also shift
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It will downshift to
first gear when the vehicle speed is
under 9 mph (15 km/h).
If you try to manually downshift at a
speed that would cause the engine to
exceed the redline in a lower gear,
the transmission will not downshift.
Thegearindicatorwillflashthe
numberofthelowergearseveral
times, then return to the higher gear.
Driving uphill
Driving on level roads and downhill
Automatic Transmission
Driving
180
−
−
→
→
→
→
→
→
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
If the car speed slows to below the
redline of the selected lower gear
position while the indicator is
flashing, the transmission will
downshift and the display will show
the selected lower gear.
If the transmission temperature is
below 14 °F ( 10 °C), you may not
be able to use the Sequential
SportShift mode.
These positions
are similar to D , except when you
select the D position, only the first
four gears are selected. When you
select D , only the first three gears
are selected. D can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
fourth and fifth gears in stop-and-go
driving, and D can keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears.
Use D when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain, or to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill. D
gives you more power and increased
engine braking.
The table shows the speed ranges
for upshifting and downshifting.
To shift from
23
34
45
Speed range
over 9 mph
(15 km/h)
over 18 mph
(29 km/h)
over 34 mph
(55 km/h)
Speed range
under 60 mph
(96 km/h)
under 65 mph
(104 km/h)
under 93 mph
(150 km/h)
under 104 mph
(166 km/h)
under 125 mph
(200 km/h)
To shift from
32
43
54
5
4
3
4
3
3
3
1:
2:
Premium model
Type S
1
2
1
2
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Drive(D,D)
43
181
−
−ForfasteraccelerationwheninD,
D or D , you can get the
transmission to automatically
downshift by pushing the accelerator
pedal to the floor. The transmission
will shift down one or two gears,
depending on your speed.
This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop. Second
gives you more power when climbing,
and increased engine braking when
going down steep hills. Use second
gear when starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow. It will help
reduce wheelspin.
With the lever in this
position, the transmission locks in
First gear.
If you shift into First position when
the vehicle speed is above 31 mph
(50 km/h), the transmission shifts
into Second gear first to avoid
sudden engine braking.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
3
45
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Second (2)
First (1) Engine Speed Limiter
182
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your car is
developing a problem. Have the car
checked by your Acura dealer.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal does not work. This procedure
also releases the Reverse Lockout.
Set the Parking brake.
Make sure the ignition switch is in
the OFF (0) position.
To release the Reverse Lockout,
make sure the ignition switch is in
the ACCESSORY (I) position.
Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover next to
the shift lever.
Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver
or small metal plate (neither are
included in the tool kit) to remove
the cover. Carefully pry off the
edge of the cover.
Insert a screwdriver in the Shift
Lock Release slot.
Push down on the screwdriver and
move the shift lever out of Park to
Neutral.
To release the Reverse Lockout,
move the shift lever from Neutral
to Reverse, then Park.
Remove the screwdriver from the
Shift Lock Release slot, then
reinstall the cover. Make sure the
notchonthecoverisontheright
side. Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Driving
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
183
SSHHIIFFTT LLOOCCKK RREELLEEAASSEE SSLLOOTTCCOOVVEERR
−
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Turn off the lights.
Lockthedoorswiththekeyorthe
remote transmitter. Check the
indicator on the driver’s door to
verify that the security system is
set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The three way catalytic
converter gets very hot, and could
cause these materials to catch on
fire.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your car. The indicator on
the instrument panel shows that the
parking brake is not fully released; it
does not indicate that the parking
brakeisfirmlyset.Makesurethe
parking brake is set firmly or your
car may roll if it is parked on an
incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the car from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission making it
easier to move the shift lever out of
Park when you want to drive away.
If the car is facing uphill, turn the
front wheels away from the curb.
If the car is facing downhill, turn the
front wheels toward the curb.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or damage
the rear brakes.
Parking Tips
Driving
Parking
184
Your Acura is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, causing them
to build up heat. Heat build-up can
reduce how well your brakes work. It
also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by downshifting to a lower
gear and taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Since a
longer distance is needed to stop
with wet brakes, be extra cautious
and alert in your driving.
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
When the brake pads need replacing,
you will hear a distinctive metallic
‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
the brakes. If you do not have the
brake pads replaced, they will begin
screeching all the time.
Your brakes may sometimes squeal
or squeak when you apply them
lightly. Do not confuse this with the
brake wear indicators. They make a
very audible ‘‘screeching.’’
Brake Wear Indicators
The Braking System
Driving
185
this defeats the
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal
as you steer away from the hazard.
This is sometimes referred to as
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal, it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes.
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tires have. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforeyou
activate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
Your car has an Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS) as standard
equipment. ABS helps to prevent the
wheels from locking up and skidding
during hard braking, allowing you to
retain steering control.
When the front tires skid, you lose
steering control; the car continues
straightaheadeventhoughyouturn
the steering wheel. The ABS helps to
prevent lock-up and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly; much faster than a
person can do it.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the car (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump the
brake pedal,
The Braking System
Driving
186
FFrroonntt
＊＊
＊＊
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your car to veer into
oncoming traffic or off the road.
it
only helps with steering control
during braking. You should always
maintain a safe following distance
from other vehicles.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
The ABS is self-checking. If anything
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
page ). This means the anti-lock
function of the braking system has
shut down. The brakes still work like
a conventional system without anti-
lock, providing normal stopping
ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your car as soon as possible.
55
CONTINUED
The Braking System
Driving
Important Safety Reminders ABS Indicator
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the car,
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
187
UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn
AABBSS IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
Your Acura is equipped with a
Traction Control System (TCS) to
assist you in maintaining traction
while driving slowly on loose or
slippery surfaces. The TCS assists
only in low-speed, low-traction
conditions; up to approximately 18
mph (30 km/h).
The TCS monitors the speed of all
four wheels. When it senses a front
wheel losing traction, it applies
braking to that wheel. The TCS
indicator flashes when this occurs.
Driving with TCS requires no special
skills or technique. The TCS does
not control your car’s whole braking
system and cannot prevent skidding
if you enter a corner too fast. It is
still your responsibility to drive at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
The TCS indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
The VSA system indicator may come
on along with the ABS indicator if
there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system.
On Premium model
On Type S
On Premium model
Driving
The Braking System, Traction Control System
Traction Control System
188
TTRRAACCTTIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
When starting out or driving at low
speeds on a loose or slippery road
surface, you may notice that the
vehicle does not respond to the
accelerator in the same way it does
at other times. This is a sign the TCS
is activating. You will see the TCS
indicator light flash.
Driving with the compact spare tire
installed (see page ) may
activate the TCS. You should turn off
the system.
If the brakes overheat while the TCS
is activating, the TCS indicator will
stop flashing and stay on temporarily.
This indicates that the TCS system
has turned off. After the brakes have
cooled down (usually for about 10
minutes), the TCS will turn back on
and the indicator will turn off.
This switch is under the side vent. It
letsyouturntheTractionControl
System on and off. You cannot turn
off the TCS while the TCS indicator
light is flashing.
Deactivate the system by pressing
the TCS On/Off switch. The TCS
indicator light comes on as a
reminder. Pressing the switch again
turns the system back on.
You should still install winter tires on
your car during the winter. Make
sure to use the same size originally
supplied with vehicle. Exercise the
samecautioninwinterdrivingasyou
would if your car was not equipped
with TCS.
272
CONTINUED
TCS ON/OFF Switch
Traction Control System
Driving
189
TTCCSS OONN//OOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH
This indicator will come on along
with the ABS indicator if there is a
problem in the anti-lock brake
system (see on page
).
The TCS indicator may occasionally
come on for one or two seconds and
then go out. This is normal.
The Traction Control System turns
on every time you start the engine,
even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
The TCS indicator comes on or
flashes under the following condi-
tions:
When you turn the ignition switch
to ON (II).
When you manually turn off the
TCS.
It flashes when the TCS is
regulating wheelspin.
If the system’s diagnostics senses
a problem in the TCS, the indica-
tor will come on and stay on.
If the brakes overheat, the
indicator will come on.
If the TCS indicator comes on and
stays on for more than 10 minutes
while driving, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the
TCS indicator. If the indicator
remains on, or comes back on while
driving, have the system inspected
by your Acura dealer. You can still
drive the vehicle without TCS.
188
ABS Indicator
TCS Indicator
Traction Control System
Driving
190
CONTINUED
The VSA system cannot enhance the
car’s driving stability in all situations
and does not control your vehicle’s
entire braking system. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA Activation indicator blink.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. You will also see
the VSA Activation Indicator blink.
The Vehicle Stability Assist system
helps to stabilize the vehicle during
cornering if the car turns more or
less than desired. It also assists you
in maintaining traction while
accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces. It does this by
regulating the engine’s output, and
by selectively applying braking.
On Type S
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Activation Indicator
191
VVSSAA AACCTTIIVVAATTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
If the VSA indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the
VSA system indicator. If the
indicator remains on, or comes back
on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your Acura
dealer.
When VSA is off, the VSA Activation
Indicator light comes on as a
reminder. Pressing the switch again
turns the system back on.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned
ON(II),theremaybeaproblem
with the VSA system. Have your
dealer inspect your car as soon as
possible.
Without VSA, your car will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
This switch is under the left vent.
Press it to turn the Vehicle Stability
Assist system on and off.
The VSA system indicator (see page
) comes on and stays on when
there is a problem with the VSA
system. The VSA Activation
indicator will also come on.
57
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA System Indicator
VSA Off Switch
192
VVSSAA SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR VVSSAA OOFFFF SSWWIITTCCHH
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the car.
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
Deactivate the VSA system if you
need to drive with the compact spare
tire installed (see page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
car. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your car was not equipped with VSA.
247
272
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA and Tire Sizes
193
− Exercise extra caution when driving
in rain after a long dry spell. After
months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
Rain, fog, and snow conditions
require a different driving technique
because of reduced traction and
visibility. Keep your car well-
maintained and exercise greater
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control
should not be used in these
conditions.
Always drive
slower than you would in dry
weather. It takes your car longer to
react, even in conditions that may
seem just barely damp. Apply
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few miles
(kilometers) of driving while you
adjust to the change in driving
conditions. This is especially true in
snow. A person can forget some
snow-driving techniques during the
summer months. Practice is needed
to relearn those skills.
Driving Technique
Driving
Driving in Bad Weather
194
−−Being able to see
clearly in all directions and being
visible to other drivers are important
in all weather conditions. This is
more difficult in bad weather. To be
seen more clearly during daylight
hours, turn on your headlights.
Check your tires
frequently for wear and proper
pressure. Both are important in
preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of
traction on a wet surface). In the
winter, mount snow tires on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Watch road conditions carefully,
they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the
outside temperature is near freezing.
The road surface can become
covered with areas of water puddles
mixed with areas of ice, so your
traction can change without warning.
Be careful when downshifting. If
traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
askid.
Be very cautious when passing, or
beingpassedbyothervehicles.The
spray from large vehicles reduces
your visibility, and the wind buffeting
can cause you to lose control.
Inspect your windshield wipers and
washers frequently. Keep the wind-
shield washer reservoir full of the
proper fluid. Have the windshield
wiper blades replaced if they start to
streak the windshield or leave parts
unwiped. Use the defroster and air
conditioning to keep the windows
from fogging up on the inside (see
pages and ).128 133
Visibility Traction
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
195
Your Acura has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control.
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
The total
weight of the trailer and
everything loaded in it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing
a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your car’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Load Limits Tongue Load:
Total Trailer Weight:
196
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Checking LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Premium model
Type S
Premium model
Type S
197
2,445 lbs (1,110 kg)
1,950 lbs (885 kg)
4,280 lbs (1,940 kg)
4,365 lbs (1,980 kg)
2,425 lbs (1,100 kg)
1,950 lbs (885 kg)
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, and
how much load you are towing.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Always use a safety chain. Make
sure that it is secured to both the
trailer and hitch, and that it cross
under the tongue so it can catch the
trailer if it becomes unhitched.
Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do
not let the chain drag on the ground.
Acura recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Hitches
Safety Chain
Trailer Brakes
198
CONTINUED
Your car has a trailer lighting
connector located in the trunk by the
left taillight. To use the connector,
undo the fastener and unscrew the
cargo net mounting button on the
left side of the trunk lining. Refer to
the drawing in this page for the
wiring color code and purpose of
each pin.
If you use a converter, you can get
the connector and pins that mate
with the connector in your car from
your Acura dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary in
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicleandthetrailer.
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights
199
GGRROOUUNNDD
((BBLLAACCKK))
BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT
((GGRREEEENN//BBLLAACCKK))
RRIIGGHHTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL
((GGRREEEENN//YYEELLLLOOWW))
TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTT
((RREEDD//BBLLAACCKK))
LLEEFFTT TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL
((GGRREEEENN//BBLLUUEE))
BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTT
((WWHHIITTEE//BBLLAACCKK))
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
inflated as recommended by the
trailer maker.
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, and cooling system
are in good operating condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages and ).
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
Allitemsonandinthetrailerare
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation. 196 197
244
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Pre-Tow Checklist
Additional Trailer Equipment
200
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
discussed below.
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the transmission shifts frequently
between 4th and 5th gears while
going up a hill, shift to D . And if the
transmission shifts frequently
between 3rd and 4th gears, shift to
D.
When towing a trailer in the
Sequential SportShift mode, select
Fourth, Third, Second, or First gear;
depending on the vehicle speeds and
road condition. Do not use Fifth gear.
The recommended speed range for
each gear position is shown in the
table.
Gear position
1
2
3, 4
Speed range
037mph
(0 60 km/h)
12 68 mph
over 25 mph
(over 40 km/h)
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D or D position when
towing a trailer on level roads. D is
the proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘ ’’ in the
following column for additional gear
information.)
4
3
54
3
(20 110 km/h)
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Driving on Hills
201
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
large vehicle, keep a constant speed
and steer straight ahead. Do not try
to make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to 2nd
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
bottom
Towing a Trailer
Driving
ParkingHandling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Backing Up
202
If you have the skills and tools to per-
form more complex maintenance
tasks on your Acura, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Acura
dealer.
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instruc-
tions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
This section explains why it is
important to keep your car well
maintained and to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
......................Maintenance Safety . 204
.Important Safety Precautions . 205
.................Maintenance Schedule . 206
...Required Maintenance Record . 213
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 215
..............................Fluid Locations . 216
......................................Engine Oil . 217
..................................Adding Oil . 217
....................Recommended Oil . 217
..............................Synthetic Oil . 218
....................................Additives . 218
.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 219
.............................Cooling System . 221
............Adding Engine Coolant . 221
.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 223
....................Windshield Washers . 227
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 228
....................................Brake Fluid . 229
............................Brake System . 229
..............................Power Steering . 230
....................................Hood Latch . 231
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 231
....................................Spark Plugs . 233
..............................Replacement . 233
............................Specifications . 235
...........................................Battery . 236
.................................Wiper Blades . 239
..............Air Conditioning System . 241
.................Air Conditioning Filter . 242
.....................................Drive Belts . 242
....................................Timing Belt . 243
...............................................Tires . 243
......................................Inflation . 243
..................................Inspection . 245
..............................Maintenance . 246
.............................Tire Rotation . 246
...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 247
......................Wheels and Tires . 248
..........................Winter Driving . 248
.............................Snow Tires . 249
............................Tire Chains . 249
.............................................Lights . 250
........................Replacing Bulbs . 252
...........................Storing Your Car . 261315
Maintenance
Maintenance
203
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
This section includes instructions for
simple maintenance tasks, such as
checking and adding oil. Any service
items not detailed in this section
should be performed by an Acura
technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Regularly maintaining your car is the
best way to protect your investment.
Proper maintenance is essential to
your safety and the safety of your
passengers. It will also reward you
with more economical, trouble-free
driving and help reduce air pollution.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
204
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this car
or failing to correct a problem
before driving can cause a
crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless in-
structed to do so.
Read the instructions before you
begin, and make sure you have the
tools and skills required.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, be careful when working
around gasoline or batteries. Use a
commercially available degreaser or
parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean
parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and
flames away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
Before you begin any maintenance,
make sure your car is parked on
level ground and that the parking
brake is set. Also, be sure the engine
is off. This will help to eliminate
several potential hazards:
You should wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
near the battery or when using
compressed air.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon monoxide poisoning
from engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
205
The Maintenance Schedule specifies
how often you should have your car
serviced and what things need
attention. It is essential that you have
your car serviced as scheduled to
retain its high level of safety,
dependability, and emissions control
performance.
Avoidexceedingyourcar’sload
limit.Thisputsexcessstresson
the engine, brakes, and many
other parts of your car. The load
limit is shown on the label on the
driver’s doorjamb.
Operate your car on reasonable
roads within the legal speed limit.
Service your car according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages. Select the schedule
for ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most of
your driving is done under one or
more of the conditions listed on that
page.Otherwise,followtheschedule
for ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’
Drive your car regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
theproperoctanerating(seepage
).
The services and time or distance
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule assume you will use your
car as normal transportation for
passengers and their possessions.
You should also follow these
recommendations:
160
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Which Schedule to Follow:
206
＃
We recommend the use of genuine
Honda parts and fluids whenever you
have maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Acura
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
Your authorized Acura dealer knows
your car best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
207
−
＃
＃
＃
Follow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule if the
severe driving conditions
specified in the Severe
Conditions Maintenance
Schedule do not apply.
NOTE: If you only
drive under a
‘‘severe’’ condition, you should
follow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule.
Follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Severe Conditions.
OCCASIONALLY
Maintenance
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
208
Visually inspect the following items:
Service at the indicated
distance or time whichever
comes first.
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace air conditioning filter
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition
at least once per month)
15
24
12
30
48
24
45
72
36
60
96
48
75
120
60
90
144
72
120
192
96
105
168
84
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Cooling system hoses and connections
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .:
Adjust only if noisy
207
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
□□
□
□
□
□
□□
□□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
＃
Maintenance
209
A, B, C
Canadian owners:
A
B
C
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval. Follow this
schedule if the severe driving conditions described in the Severe Conditions Schedule on the next page do not apply.
Follow the schedule for Severe Conditions.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Replace coolant. Replace brake fluid.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Replace coolant. Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid.
Replace transmission fluid.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump.
Replace coolant. Inspect valve clearance.
Check idle speed. Replace spark plugs.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Replace engine oil.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 246 ).
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Replace air cleaner element.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace air conditioning filter.
7,500 mi/12,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1yr
22,500 mi/36,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
37,500 mi/60,000 km
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
52,500 mi/84,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
67,500 mi/108,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
82,500 mi/132,000 km
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
97,500 mi/156,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
112,500 mi/180,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
:
NOTE:
207
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
−
−
＃
＊
＊
＃＊
＊
＃＃
Follow the Severe Conditions
Maintenance Schedule if you
drive your car under
one or more of the following
conditions:
Driving less than 5 miles (8
km) per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less
than 10 miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot
[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long
periods of stop-and-go driving.
Trailer towing, driving with a
roof rack, or driving in
mountainous conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or
de-iced roads.
Follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Severe Conditions.
MAINLY
Maintenance
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
210
Visually inspect the following items:
Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Service at the indicated
distance or time whichever
comes first.
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Clean ( ) or replace ( ) air
cleaner element
Use normal schedule except in
dusty conditions
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace air conditioning filter
Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition
at least once per month)
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 monthsTie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components, Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Cooling system hoses and connections
Exhaust system, Fuel lines and connections
Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
15
24
12
30
48
24
45
72
36
60
96
48
75
120
60
90
144
72
105
168
84
120
192
96
Refer to page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Refer to page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .:
1:
2:
Adjust only if noisy
242
243
207
Type S
Premium model
1
2
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
□□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃＊
＃
＃
＊
＃
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Maintenance
211
A, B, C, D
Severe Conditions:
A
B
C
D
E
Use this schedule if your vehicle is MAINLY driven in any of the following Severe Conditions, or normally driven in Canada; otherwise use the Normal
Schedule. Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km) per trip or, in freezing temperatures, driving less than 10 miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot (over 90°F/32°C) conditions.
Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
Trailer towing, driving with a roof rack, or driving in mountainous conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.
3,750 mi/6,000 km/-
7,500 mi/12,000 km/6 mos
11,250 mi/18,000 km/-
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
18,750 mi/30,000 km/-
22,500 mi/36,000 km/1½ yrs
26,250 mi/42,000 km/-
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
33,750 mi/54,000 km/-
37,500 mi/60,000 km/2½ yrs
41,250 mi/66,000 km/-
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
48,750 mi/78,000 km/-
52,500 mi/84,000 km/3½ yrs
56,250 mi/90,000 km/-
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
63,750 mi/102,000 km/-
67,500 mi/108,000 km/4½ yrs
71,250 mi/114,000 km/-
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
78,750 mi/126,000 km/-
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace coolant. Replace brake fluid.
DoitemsinA,B,C,E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace coolant.
DoitemsinA,B,C,E.
Do items in A.
Replace engine oil and filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 246 ).
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Replace air cleaner element. (Type S)
Check parking brake adjustment.
Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches with
multipurpose grease.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Check all lights.
Inspect the underbody.
Replace air cleaner element. (Premium model)
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace transmission fluid.
Replace air conditioning filter .
Clean air cleaner element. (Premium model)
·
·
·
·
·
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacement
information under special driving conditions.
See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
NOTE:
:
1:
2:
207
243
242
1
2
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
□
□
□□ □
□□
□
＊
＊
＃
＊
＊
Maintenance
212
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.
See Air Conditioning Filter on page for replacement
information under special driving conditions.
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
:
1:
2:
NOTE:
207
243
242
82,500 mi/132,000 km/5½ yrs
86,250 mi/138,000 km/-
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
93,750 mi/150,000 km/-
97,500 mi/156,000 km/6½ yrs
101,250 mi/162,000 km/-
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
108,750 mi/174,000 km/-
112,500 mi/180,000 km/7½ yrs
116,250 mi/186,000 km/-
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid. Do items in A, B, C, D.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.
Replace coolant. Check idle speed. Inspect
idle speed.
Replace spark plugs. Inspect valve clearance.
DoitemsinA,B,C,E.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
1
1
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
213
33,750 mi
37,500 mi
41,250 mi
45,000 mi
48,750 mi
52,500 mi
56,250 mi
60,000 mi
3,750 mi
7,500 mi
11,250 mi
15,000 mi
18,750 mi
22,500 mi
26,250 mi
30,000 mi
54,000 km
60,000 km
(or 2½ years)
66,000 km
72,000 km
(or 3 years)
78,000 km
84,000 km
(or 3½ years)
90,000 km
96,000 km
(or 4 years)
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe
conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.
6,000 km
12,000 km
(or 6 mo)
18,000 km
24,000 km
(or 1 year)
30,000 km
36,000 km
(or 1½ years)
42,000 km
48,000 km
(or 2 years)
208
210
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
214
63,750 mi
67,500 mi
71,250 mi
75,000 mi
78,750 mi
82,500 mi
86,250 mi
90,000 mi
93,750 mi
97,500 mi
101,250 mi
105,000 mi
108,750 mi
112,500 mi
116,250 mi
120,000 mi
102,000 km
108,000 km
(or 4½ years)
114,000 km
120,000 km
(or 5 years)
126,000 km
132,000 km
(or 5½ years)
138,000 km
144,000 km
(or 6 years)
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
150,000 km
156,000 km
(or 6½ years)
162,000 km
168,000 km
(or 7 years)
174,000 km
180,000 km
(or 7½ years)
186,000 km
192,000 km
(or 8 years)
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the page given.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
youfillthefueltank.Seepage .
Windshield washer fluid Check
the level in the reservoir monthly.
If weather conditions cause you to
use the washers frequently, check
the reservoir each time you stop
for fuel. See page .
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate lights monthly. See
page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
163
165
227
228
229
243
250
Owner Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
215
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
216
BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD
((GGrraayy ccaapp))
AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC
TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN
FFLLUUIIDD DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
((YYeellllooww lloooopp))
EENNGGIINNEE
CCOOOOLLAANNTT
RREESSEERRVVOOIIRR
RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
((OOrraannggee lloooopp))
WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD
((BBlluuee ccaapp))
PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG
FFLLUUIIDD ((RReedd ccaapp))
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade deter-
gent oil. It is highly recommended
that you use genuine Honda Motor
Oil in your vehicle for as long as you
own it.
The API Service label also tells you
the service classification of the oil.
Always use an oil that is labeled ‘‘API
Service SJ.’’ This service rating may
include other classifications, such as
CD. These additional classifications
are not a problem, as long as the
label also carries the SJ classification.
Youcandetermineanoil’sSAE
viscosity and Service Classification
fromtheAPIServicelabelontheoil
container.
A fuel-efficient oil is recommended
foryourAcura.Thisisshownonthe
API Service label by the words
‘‘Energy Conserving.’’ This oil is
formulated to help your engine use
less fuel.
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes and recheck the
oil level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
CONTINUED
Adding Oil Recommended Oil
Engine Oil
Maintenance
217
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL FFIILLLL CCAAPP
AAPPII SSEERRVVIICCEE LLAABBEELL
−
The oil container may also display
the API Certification seal. Make sure
it says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is
preferred for improved fuel economy
and year-round protection in your
Acura. You may use a 10W-30 oil if
the temperature in your area never
goes below 20°F ( 7°C).
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for conventional motor oil:
energy conserving, a service
classification of SJ, and the proper
weightasshownonthechart.When
using synthetic oil, you must follow
the oil and filter change intervals
given in the maintenance schedule.
The SAE numbers tell you the oil’s
viscosity or weight. Select the oil for
your car according to this chart.
Your Acura does not need any oil
additives. Purchasing additives for
the engine or transmission will not
increase your car’s performance or
longevity. It only increases the cost
of operating your car.
Synthetic Oil
Additives
Engine Oil
Maintenance
218
AAmmbbiieenntt TTeemmppeerraattuurree
AAPPII CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN SSEEAALL
Always change the oil and filter
accordingtothetimeanddistance
(miles/kilometers) recommenda-
tions in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contami-
nants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your Acura
dealer) is required to remove the
filter.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the car. The car should
be raised on a service station-type
hydraulic lift for this service. Unless
you have the knowledge and proper
equipment, you should have this
maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Changing the Oil and Filter
Engine Oil
Maintenance
219
WWAASSHHEERR
OOIILL DDRRAAIINN
BBOOLLTT
OOIILL FFIILLTTEERR
Let the engine run for several
minutes and check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level. If necessary, add oil to bring
the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator light should go out within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off
the engine and reinspect your
work.
6.
7.
8.
9.
4.
5.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
220
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.6 US qt (4.4
, 3.9 Imp qt)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
This coolant should always be a
mixtureof50percentantifreezeand
50 percent water. Never add straight
antifreeze or plain water.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
If it is not available, you may use
another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
However, continued use of any non-
Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
1.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
221
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Put the radiator cap back on.
Tighten it fully.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
Turn the radiator cap counter-
clockwise, without pressing down
on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the
cooling system.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your car’s cooling
system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or engine compo-
nents.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Cooling System
Maintenance
222
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK
RRAADDIIAATTOORR CCAAPP
Thecoolingsystemshouldbe
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
Genuine Honda All season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the car. Unless
you have the tools and knowledge,
you should have this maintenance
done by a skilled mechanic.
Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn
the heater temperature control
dial to maximum heat (climate
control to 90°F/32°C). Turn off
the ignition. Open the hood. Make
sure the engine and radiator are
cool to the touch.
Remove the radiator cap.
Loosen the drain plug on the
bottom of the radiator. The
coolant will drain through the
splash guard.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Replacing Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
223
DDRRAAIINN PPLLUUGG
Install a rubber hose on the drain
bolt at the rear of the engine
cylinder block. Loosen the drain
bolt.
Remove the reserve tank from its
holder by pulling it straight up.
Drain the coolant, then put the
tank back in its holder.
Before removing the reserve tank,
remove the cruise control cable
from its clip, then remove the
ground cable from the clip on the
reserve tank. To remove the
cruise control cable, pivot the
upper part of the clip and push
down the lower part slightly.
After installing the tank back in
place, put the cables back in their
clips.
5.4. 6.
Cooling System
Maintenance
224
HHOOLLDDEERRDDRRAAIINN BBOOLLTT
RRUUBBBBEERR
HHOOSSEE
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK CCAAPPCCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL CCAABBLLEE
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK
CONTINUED
Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap.
When the coolant stops draining,
tightenthedrainplugatthe
bottom of the radiator.
Tighten the drain bolt at the rear
of the engine cylinder block
securely.
Tightening torque:
Mix the recommended antifreeze
with an equal amount of purified
or distilled water in a clean
container. The cooling system
capacity is:
Pour coolant into the radiator up
to the base of the filler neck. Start
the engine and let it run for about
30 seconds. Then turn off the
engine. Pour coolant into the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck.
7.
8.
9. 10.
Cooling System
Maintenance
225
FFIILLLLEERR NNEECCKKFFiillll uupp ttoo hheerree
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK
1.48 US gal (5.6 , 1.23 Imp gal)
7 lbf·ft (10 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it to the first stop.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Then stop the
engine.
Remove the radiator cap. Pour
coolant into the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck and into the
reserve tank up to the MAX mark.
Start the engine and hold it at
1,500 rpm until the cooling fan
comes on. Turn off the engine.
Check the coolant level in the
radiator and add coolant if needed.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it fully.
If necessary, fill the reserve tank
to the MAX mark. Install the
reserve tank cap.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Cooling System
Maintenance
226
RREESSEERRVVEE TTAANNKK
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal usage. In bad weather,
when you use the washers often,
check the level every time you stop
for fuel.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
The windshield washer reservoir is
located behind the passenger’s side
headlight.
The low washer level indicator will
light when the level is low (see page
).
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by
removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
59
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
Canadian Models
227
LLEEVVEELL GGAAUUGGEE
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,
while a vinegar/water solution can
damage the windshield washer pump.
Use only commercially-available
windshield washer f luid.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Park the car on level ground. Shut
off the engine.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug and add
fluid to bring it to the upper mark.
Always use Honda Premium
Formula Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF). If it is not available,
you may use a DEXRON
III
automatic transmission fluid as a
temporary replacement. However,
continued use can affect shift
quality. Have the transmission
drained and refilled with Honda
ATF as soon as it is convenient.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
Ifyouarenotsurehowtoaddfluid,
contact your Acura dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
228
UUPPPPEERR MMAARRKK
LLOOWWEERR MMAARRKK
DDIIPPSSTTIICCKK
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. However, the use of
any non-Honda brake fluid can cause
corrosion and decrease the life of the
system. Have the brake system
flushed and refilled with Honda
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as
soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your car’s braking
system and can cause extensive
damage.
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
The brake fluid should be replaced
accordingtothetimeanddistance
recommendations in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Brake System
Brake Fluid
Maintenance
229
MMIINN
MMAAXX
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. If it is not available, you may
use another power steering fluid as
an emergency replacement.
However, continued use can cause
increased wear and poor steering in
cold weather. Have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
You should check the fluid level in
the power steering reservoir
monthly. Check the level when the
engine is cold. Look at the side of
the reservoir. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the
LOWER LEVEL, add power steering
fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.
Power Steering
Maintenance
230
UUPPPPEERR LLEEVVEELL
LLOOWWEERR LLEEVVEELL
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
CONTINUED
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts (as shown),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Acura dealer.
The air cleaner element should be
cleaned or replaced according to the
time and distance recommendations
in the maintenance schedule.
Follow the replacement procedure
for removal and reinstallation.
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
To replace it:
Removethecruisecontrolcable
from its clip.
Loosen the four bolts by using a
Phillips-head screwdriver and
remove the air cleaner housing
cover.
Clean the air cleaner element by
blowing compressed air through it in
the opposite direction to normal air
flow. If you do not have access to
compressed air (such as a service
station), ask your Acura dealer to do
this service.
1.
2.
On Premium model
Premium model
Hood Latch Air Cleaner Element
Cleaning (Severe Conditions)
Replacement
Hood Latch, Air Cleaner Element
Maintenance
231
LLAATTCCHH AASSSSEEMMBBLLYY
BBOOLLTTSS
Loosen the two bolts with a
Phillips-head screwdriver. Remove
the air cleaner housing cover by
lifting and pivoting it out of the
loops.
Remove the old air cleaner
element.
Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover, tighten the four bolts.
Align the tabs on the battery side
and reinstall the air cleaner
housing cover, then tighten the
two bolts.
Put the cruise control cable back
in place.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
On Premium model
On Type S
On Type S
Air Cleaner Element
Maintenance
232
AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR
EELLEEMMEENNTT
LLOOOOPP PPrreemmiiuumm mmooddeell
AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR
EELLEEMMEENNTT
TTyyppee SS
BBOOLLTTSS
CONTINUED
The spark plugs in your car are a
special platinum-tipped design for
longer life. The spark plugs should
be replaced according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule.
Loosen the two holding clips by
turning the heads one-quarter turn
counterclockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver. Remove the cover on
the front cylinder bank by pulling
it straight up.
Clean up any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils.
Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
1.
2.
3.
Replacement
Spark Plugs
Maintenance
233
HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPP
IIGGNNIITTIIOONN CCOOIILL
CCOONNNNEECCTTOORR
LLOOCCKK
TTAABB
Use a wrench to remove the
hexagonsocketheadcapbolt
holding the ignition coil. Remove
the ignition coil by pulling it
straight out.
Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
Put the new spark plug into the
socket; then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
4.
5.
6. 7.
Spark Plugs
Maintenance
234
HHEEXXAAGGOONN SSOOCCKKEETT HHEEAADD CCAAPP BBOOLLTT
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
＋
−
＋
−
Install the ignition coil. Reinstall
the hexagon socket head cap bolt.
Push the wire connector onto the
ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.
Repeat this procedure for the
other five spark plugs.
Reinstall the cover on the front
cylinder bank while putting its
mounting clip in the hole on the
passenger’s side. Secure the cover
by turning the heads of the two
holding clips one-quarter turn
clockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver.
Spark Plug Gap:
Spark Plug Gap:
8.
9.
10.
11.
NGK:
DENSO:
NGK:
DENSO:
Spark Plugs
Maintenance
Specifications:
Premium model
Type S
235
0.04 in (1.1 mm)
0.04 in (1.1 mm)
PZFR5F-11
PKJ16CR-L11
PZFR6F-11
PKJ20CR-L11
0
0.1 mm
0
0.1 mm
Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
Check the battery condition by
looking at the test indicator window
on the battery.
The label on the battery explains the
test indicator’s colors.
Check the condition of your car’s
battery monthly. You should check
the color of the test indicator window,
and for corrosion on the terminals.
To remove the battery cover, pull up
on the right side of the cover to
remove it from the bolt, then pull the
cover out.
To reinstall the cover, insert the pins
ontheleftsideofthecoverintothe
holes and put the cover over the
battery, then push the right side of
the cover over the bolt.
Maintenance
Battery
236
TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW
TTEESSTT IINNDDIICCAATTOORR WWIINNDDOOWW
BBAATTTTEERRYY
CCOOVVEERR
−
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
If the terminals are severely cor-
roded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative ( ) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery termi-
nals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the car’s
electrical system.
CONTINUED
Battery
Maintenance
237
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, the audio system will
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the radio you will see ‘‘ ’’
in the frequency display. Use the
Preset buttons to enter the five-digit
code (see page ).
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, all stored driving
positions will be lost. To store the
driving positions again, see the
storingprocedureonpage .
The Navigation System will also
disableitself.Thenexttimeyouturn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
157
103
3.2 CL with Navigation System
Battery
Maintenance
238
Charging the battery with the cables
connected can seriously damage your
car’s electronic controls. Detach the
battery cables bef ore connecting the
battery to a charger.
−
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold it in while you
push the blade assembly toward
thebaseofthearm.
To replace the blade:
Turn the ignition ON (II), switch
the wipers to INT or (low
position), then turn the ignition
OFF when the wiper arm is
approximately midway in its travel.
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
1.
2. 3.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
239
WWIIPPEERR AARRMMSS
LLOOCCKK
TTAABB
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal rein-
forcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Turn the ignition switch ON (II)
and return the windshield wipers
to their park position.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield.
4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
240
BBLLAADDEE BBLLAADDEE
RREEIINNFFOORRCCEEMMEENNTT
Run the air conditioning at least once
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least ten
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.
If the air conditioning does not get as
cold as before, have your dealer
check the system. Recharge the
system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
(R-134a). (See Specifications on page
.)
Periodically check the engine’s
radiator and air conditioning
condenser for leaves, insects, and
dirt stuck to the front surface. These
block the air flow and reduce cooling
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
Your car’s air conditioning is a sealed
system. Any major maintenance,
such as recharging, should be done
by a qualified mechanic. You can do
a couple of things to make sure the
air conditioning works efficiently. 300
Air Conditioning System
Maintenance
241
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG CCOONNDDEENNSSEERR
Whenever you have the air conditioning
system serviced, make sure the service
f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling
system. This system captures the
ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing
ref rigerant into the atmosphere can
damage the environment.
The condenser and radiator f ins bend
easily. Only use a low-pressure spray
or sof t-bristle brush to clean them.
−−
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under nor-
mal conditions. It should be replaced
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you
drive primarily in urban areas that
have high concentrations of soot in
the air from industry and diesel-pow-
ered vehicles. Replace it more often
if air flow from the climate control
system becomes less than usual.
Have the air conditioning filter re-
placed by your Acura dealer.
The air conditioning filter removes
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the climate
control system.
Check the condition of the two drive
belts (power steering belt and
alternator belt). Examine the edges
of each belt for cracks or fraying.
Check the tension of the power
steering belt by pushing on it with
your thumb midway between the
pulleys.
Thebeltshouldhavethefollowing
‘‘play’’ or deflection.
Power steering belt:
If you see signs of wear or looseness,
have your dealer adjust or replace
the belts.
Air Conditioning Filter Drive Belts
Air Conditioning Filter, Drive Belts
Maintenance
242
AALLTTEERRNNAATTOORR BBEELLTT
PPOOWWEERR SSTTEEEERRIINNGG BBEELLTT
0.51 0.65 in (13.0 16.5 mm)
−− We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
To safely operate your car, your tires
must be the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread,
and correctly inflated. The following
pages give more detailed information
on how and when to check air
pressure, how to inspect your tires
for damage and wear, and what to do
when your tires need to be replaced.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life and riding
comfort. Underinflated tires wear
unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your car
ride more harshly, are more prone to
damage from road hazards, and wear
unevenly.
The timing belt should normally be
replaced at the intervals shown in
the maintenance schedule.
Replace this belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you
regularly drive your car in one or
more of these conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
CONTINUED
InflationTiresTiming Belt
Timing Belt, Tires
Maintenance
243
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
thesametimeyoucheckallthe
other tires.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions and
speeds. Tire pressures for high
speed driving are the same as for
normal driving.
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot (the car has been driven
several miles), you will see readings
4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold
pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the car
has been parked for at least three
hours. If you have to drive the car
before checking the tire pressure,
the tires can still be considered
‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
Tire Size
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Tire Size
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Premium model
Type S
Recommended Tire Pressures for
Normal Driving
Tires
Maintenance
244
P205/60R16 91V
P215/50R17 93V
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
Your car’s tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down to that point, you
will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A
tire that is this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see the
tread wear indicator in three or more
places around the tire.
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured.
However, because leakage is often
very slow, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
These pressures are also given on
thetireinformationlabelonthe
driver’s doorjamb.
Inspection
Tires
Maintenance
245
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKKSS
TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORRSS
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
The tires were properly balanced by
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tires if you feel a consis-
tent vibration while driving. A tire
should always be rebalanced if it is
removed from the wheel for repair. To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, you
should have the tires rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated.
Make sure the installer balances the
wheels when you have new tires
installed. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. Your car’s
original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.
Maintenance Tire Rotation
Tires
Maintenance
246
((FFoorr NNoonn--ddiirreeccttiioonnaall
TTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))
((FFoorr DDiirreeccttiioonnaall
TTiirreess aanndd WWhheeeellss))
FFrroonntt FFrroonntt
Improper wheel weights can damage
your car’s aluminum wheels. Use only
Genuine Acura wheel weights f or
balancing.
When shopping for replacement
tires, you may find that some tires
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tires,
they should be rotated only front-to-
back.
The tires that came with your car
were selected to match the perform-
ance capabilities of the car while
providing the best combination of
handling, ride comfort, and long life.
Youshouldreplacethemwithradial
tires of the same size, load range,
speed rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall). Mixing radial and
bias-ply tires on your car can reduce
its braking ability, traction, and
steering accuracy. It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, then replace the two
front tires or the two rear tires as a
pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your car’s handling.
CONTINUED
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
Maintenance
247
Installing improper tires on your
car can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or
‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an
all-weather tread design. They
should be suitable for most winter
driving conditions. Tires without
these markings are designed for
optimum traction in dry conditions.
They may not provide adequate
performance in winter driving.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Wheels:
If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure you use an identical style
aluminum alloy wheel that originally
came on your Acura. Replacement
wheels are available at your Acura
dealer.
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of the wheels.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the car.
Tire size and construction can affect
wheel speed and may cause the
system to work inconsistently.
Tires:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading.
302
Premium model
Type S
Premium model
Type S
Winter DrivingWheels and Tires
Tires
Maintenance
248
16x61/2JJ
P205/60R16 91V
17x7JJ
P215/50R17 93V
If you mount snow tires on your
Acura, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tiresonallfourwheelstobalance
your car’s handling in all weather
conditions. Keep in mind the traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may not be as high as your car’s
original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads
areclear.Checkwiththetiredealer
for maximum speed recommen-
dations.
Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not
be used. No matter how tight they
seem to be installed, they can come
into contact with the body and
suspension, causing serious damage.
Because your Acura has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices on the
front tires. Use traction devices only
when required by driving conditions
or local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires.
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with them installed. If
youhearthemcomingincontact
with the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Make sure the cables are
installed tightly, and that they are
not contacting the brake lines or
suspension.
Remove them as soon as you begin
driving on cleared roads.
Do not install any types of chains or
cable-type traction devices on your
vehicle.
Snow Tires Tire Chains
Premium model only
Type S
Tires
Maintenance
249
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your car’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the car.
Check the operation of your car’s
exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
car’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
Lights
Maintenance
250
SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTT
LLOOWW BBEEAAMM
HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT
TTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL//
PPAARRKKIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT
RROOAADD LLAAMMPP
HHIIGGHH BBEEAAMM HHEEAADDLLIIGGHHTT
Check the following:
Ifyoufindanybulbsareburnedout,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page to
determinewhattypeofreplacement
bulb is needed.
Headlights (low and high beam)
Road lamps
Parking lights
Taillights
Brake lights
Turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
License plate light
Side marker lights
High-mount brake light
Daytime running lights (Canadian
models)
301
Lights
Maintenance
251
HHIIGGHH--MMOOUUNNTT BBRRAAKKEE LLIIGGHHTTTTUURRNN SSIIGGNNAALL LLIIGGHHTT BBAACCKK--UUPP LLIIGGHHTT
LLIICCEENNSSEE PPLLAATTEE LLIIGGHHTT
SSTTOOPP//TTAAIILL//SSIIDDEE MMAARRKKEERR LLIIGGHHTTSS
SSTTOOPP//TTAAIILLLLIIGGHHTTSS
Halogen bulbs are used for the high
beam headlight bulbs. When
replacing a high beam headlight bulb,
handle it by its base and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
The low beam headlight bulbs are a
type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the light switch off
and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to
examine or change a low beam
headlight bulb yourself. If a low
beam headlight bulb fails, take the
cartoyourdealertohaveitreplaced.
Open the hood.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
If you need to change a bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the
radiator reserve tank.
1.
2.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a High Beam Headlight
Bulb
252
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Insert the new bulb into the hole
and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
(Driver’s side)
Reinstall the radiator reserve tank.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lights
Maintenance
253
BBUULLBB
TTAABB
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the three holding clips
from the splash shield. Pull the
splash shield down.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Put the splash shield in place.
Reinstall the three holding clips.
Lock each clip in place by pushing
on the center.
Insert the socket and turn it one-
quarter turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Road Lamp Bulb
254
HHOOLLDDIINNGG CCLLIIPPSS
If you are changing the bulb on
the driver’s side, start the engine,
turn the steering wheel all the way
to the right, and turn off the
engine. If you are changing the
bulb on the passenger’s side, turn
the steering wheel to the left.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
To remove the front turn signal/
parking light bulb, push it in
slightly and turn it
counterclockwise. To remove the
side marker bulb, pull it straight
out of its socket.
Install the new bulb into the
socket.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Put the inner fender in place.
Install the two holding clips. Lock
each clip in place by pushing on
the center.
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Front Turn Signal/
Parking and Side Marker Light
Bulbs
255
HHOOLLDDIINNGG
CCLLIIPPSS
Open the trunk.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Reinstall the trunk lining. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the trunk seal.
Remove the fastener on the edge
of the trunk opening by turning it
counterclockwise with a coin.
Unscrew the cargo net mounting
button. Pull the lining back.
Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, stop/
tail/side marker light, back-up
light, or turn signal.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
1.
3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
Lights
Maintenance
256
FFAASSTTEENNEERR
CCAARRGGOO NNEETT
MMOOUUNNTTIINNGG
BBUUTTTTOONN
Open the trunk and remove the
socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
Reinstall the socket. Turn it
clockwise until it locks.
Testthelightstomakesurethe
new bulb is working.
Put the fastener in the hole on the
side of the trunk lining and push
on the center until it locks (the
center is flush with the head).
Screw the cargo net mounting
button back into the hole.
Remove the burned-out bulb by
pulling it straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb in the socket.
1.
2.
8.
9.
3.
4.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
257
Use a small Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the two
screws. Remove the lens from the
license plate assembly.
The courtesy lights in the doors and
roof come apart the same way. They
do not use the same type of bulb.
Removethelensbycarefully
prying on the edge of the lens with
a fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out. Push the new bulb
into the socket.
Put the lens back in place and
tighten the two screws securely.
1.
2.
3.
1.
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
Replacing Bulbs in the Interior
Courtesy Lights
Lights
Maintenance
258
SSCCRREEWWSS
CCEEIILLIINNGG LLIIGGHHTT
Door light:
Pry on the top middle of the lens.
Ceiling light:
Pry on the front edge of the lens
near both sides.
Spotlights:
Pry on the front edge in front of
both spotlights.
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Snap the lens back in place.
2.
3.
Maintenance
Lights
259
VVAANNIITTYY MMIIRRRROORR LLIIGGHHTTSSPPOOTTLLIIGGHHTTSS DDOOOORR LLIIGGHHTT
Open the trunk. Pull down the
trunk light cover.
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs.
Push the cover back in place.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Maintenance
Lights
Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb
260
TTRRUUNNKK LLIIGGHHTT
CCOOVVEERR
Block the rear wheels.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page ).
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
If you need to park your car for an
extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your car back on the road. If
possible, store your car indoors.
If the car is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the car is being stored indoors).
Coverthecarwitha‘‘breathable’’
cover, one made from a porous
material such as cotton.
Nonporous materials, such as
plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
If possible, run the engine for a
while periodically (preferably once
amonth).
If you store your car for 12 months
or longer, have your Acura dealer
perform the inspections called for in
the 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000
km) maintenance schedule (Normal
Conditions) as soon as you take it
out of storage (see page ). The
replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the car has actually
reached that time or mileage.
219
208
Maintenance
Storing Your Car
261
262
Regular cleaning and polishing of
your Acura helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you hints
on how to clean your car and
preserve its appearance: the paint,
brightwork, wheels and interior. Also
included are several things you can
do to help prevent corrosion.
.................................Exterior Care . 264
.....................................Washing . 264
.......................................Waxing . 265
....................Aluminum Wheels . 265
..........................Paint Touch-up . 265
..................................Interior Care . 266
...................................Carpeting . 266
.................................Floor Mats . 266
.........................................Fabric . 267
...........................................Vinyl . 267
.......................................Leather . 267
...................................Seat Belts . 267
................................Wood Trim . 268
....................................Windows . 268
..........................Air Fresheners . 268
....................Corrosion Protection . 269
.................................Body Repairs . 270
Appearance Care
Appearance Care
263
When you have washed and rinsed
the whole exterior, dry it with a
chamois or soft towel. Letting it
air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix
in a mild detergent, such as
dishwashing liquid or a product
made especially for car washing.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommendedinthisOwner’s
Manual.
Wash your car in a shady area, not in
direct sunlight. If the car is parked in
the sun, move it into the shade and
let the exterior cool down before you
start.
Wash the car using the water and
detergent solution and a soft-
bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Start at the top and work your way
down. Rinse frequently.
Frequent washing helps preserve
your car’s beauty. Dirt and grit can
scratch the paint, while tree sap and
bird droppings can permanently ruin
the finish.
Rinse the car thoroughly with cool
water to remove loose dirt.
As you dry the car, inspect it for
chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page ).
Check the body for road tar, tree
sap, etc. Remove these stains with
tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to re-
wax these areas, even if the rest of
the car does not need waxing.
265
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Washing
264
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your car.
−
−
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the
instructions on the container. In
general, there are two types of
products:
Waxes A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your Acura
when it is new.
Polishes Polishes and cleaner/
waxes can restore the shine to paint
that has oxidized and lost some of its
shine. They normally contain mild
abrasives and solvents that remove
the top layer of the finish. You
should use a polish on your Acura if
the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
Clean your Acura’s aluminum alloy
wheels as you do the rest of the
exterior.Washthemwiththesame
solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
The wheels have a protective clear-
coat that keeps the aluminum from
corroding and tarnishing. Using
harsh chemicals, including some
commercial wheel cleaners, or stiff
brushes can damage this clear-coat.
Only use a mild detergent and soft
brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
Always wash and dry the whole car
before waxing it. You should wax
your car, including the metal trim,
whenever water sits on the surface
in large patches. It should form into
beads or droplets after waxing.
Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
removers also takes off the wax.
Remember to re-wax those areas,
even if the rest of the car does not
need waxing. Inspect your car frequently for chips
or scratches in the paint. Repair
them right away to prevent corrosion
of the metal underneath. Use the
touch-up paint only on small chips
and scratches. More extensive paint
damage should be repaired by a
professional.
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your car’s color. The color
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct color.
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Waxing
Aluminum Wheels
Paint Touch-up
265
Vacuum the carpeting frequently to
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to
keep it looking new. Use one of the
foam-type carpet cleaners on the
market. Follow the instructions that
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep
the carpeting as dry as possible by
not adding water to the foam.
The Genuine Acura driver’s floor
matthatcamewithyourcarwas
designed to be hooked over the floor
mat anchor. This keeps the floor mat
from sliding forward and possibly
interfering with the pedals.
If you remove the floor mat, make
sure to re-anchor it when you put it
back in your car.
If you replace it, use a genuine Acura
floormatthatisdesignedtobeused
with the floor mat anchor in your car.
If you use a non-Acura floor mat in
the driver’s footwell, make sure it
fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.
Do not put additional floor mats on
top of the anchored mat, otherwise
the additional mats may slide
forward and interfere with the pedals.
Carpeting Floor Mats
Appearance Care
Interior Care
266
If your seat belts get dirty, you can
use a soft brush with a mixture of
mild soap and warm water to clean
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
cleaning solvents. They can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts air-
drybeforeyouusethecar.
Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
material frequently. For general
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
first, to make sure it does not bleach
or stain the fabric. Follow the
instructions that come with the
cleaner.
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay particular
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with clear water, then
buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If
further cleaning is needed, use a
soap specifically for leather, such as
saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
damp,softcloth.Wipedownand
buff as described above.
CONTINUED
Seat BeltsFabric
Vinyl
Leather
Appearance Care
Interior Care
267
LLOOOOPP
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass
cleaner. You can also use a mixture
of one part white vinegar to ten parts
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces. If you use a liquid air freshener,
make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
Clean the wood trim with a soft cloth
dipped in clear water and wipe it dry
with another soft cloth. Soap may
leave a film that dulls the finish.
If you want to use an air freshener/
deodorizer in the interior of your car,
it is best to use a solid type. Some
liquid air fresheners contain chemi-
cals that may cause parts of the
interior trim and fabric to crack or
discolor.
Windows Air Fresheners
Wood Trim
Interior Care
Appearance Care
268
The rear window def ogger and
antenna wires are bonded to the inside
of the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-
down can dislodge and break these
wires. When cleaning the rear window,
use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-
side.
Repair chips and scratches in the
paint as soon as you discover them.
Inspect and clean out the drain
holes in the bottom of the doors
and body.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
Two factors normally contribute to
causing corrosion in your car:
Many corrosion-preventive measures
are built into your Acura. You can
help keep your car from corroding
by performing some simple periodic
maintenance:
Use a high-pressure spray to clean
the underside of your car. This is
especially important in areas that
useroadsaltinwinter.Itisalsoa
good idea in humid climates and
areas subject to salt air. Be careful
of the ABS wheel sensors and
wiring at each wheel.
Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings on the underside of your
car inspected and repaired
periodically.
Removal of paint and protective
coatings from the exterior and
underside of the car.
Moisture trapped in body cavities.
Dirtandroadsaltthatcollectsin
hollows on the underside of the
car stays damp, promoting
corrosion in that area.
1.
2.
Corrosion Protection
Appearance Care
269
Make sure the repair facility uses
Genuine Acura replacement body
parts. Some companies make sheet
metal pieces that seem to duplicate
the original Acura body parts, but
are actually inferior in fit, finish, and
corrosion resistance. Once installed,
they do not give the same high-
quality appearance.
Takeyourcartoyourauthorized
Acura dealer for inspection after the
repairs are completed. Your dealer
can make sure that quality materials
were used, and that corrosion-
preventive coatings were applied to
all repaired and replaced parts.
When reporting your collision to the
insurance company, tell them you
want Genuine Acura parts used in
the repair. Although most insurers
recognize the quality of original
parts, some may try to specify that
the repairs be done with other
available parts. You should investi-
gate this before any repairs have
begun.
Body repairs can affect your car’s
resistance to corrosion. If your car
needs repairs after a collision, pay
close attention to the parts used in
the repair and the quality of the
work.
Body Repairs
Appearance Care
270
This section covers the more-
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your car towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 272
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 273
..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 278
Nothing Happens or the
Starter Motor Operates
........................Very Slowly . 278
The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 279
................................Jump Starting . 280
............If Your Engine Overheats . 282
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 284
..........Charging System Indicator . 285
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 286
...............Brake System Indicator . 287
..................Closing the Moonroof . 288
..............................................Fuses . 289
..........Checking and Replacing . 290
......................Emergency Towing . 295
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
271
Thecompactsparetirehasashorter
tread life than a regular tire. Replace
it when you can see the tread wear
indicator bars. The replacement
shouldbethesamesizeanddesign
tire, mounted on the same wheel.
Thecompactsparetireisnot
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the compact wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Your car has a compact spare tire
that takes up less space. Use this
sparetireasatemporaryreplace-
ment only. Get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put it back
on your car as soon as you can.
Follow these precautions whenever
you are using the compact spare tire:
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
under any circumstances.
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
faces than the regular tire. Use
greater caution while driving on
this tire.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare.
The wheel of the compact spare
tire is designed especially to fit
your car. Do not use your spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Turn off the Traction Control
System (see page ). Driving
withthecompactsparetiremay
activate the TCS.
Turn off the VSA system (see
page ).
Driving with the compact spare
tiremayactivatetheVSAsystem.
189
192
On Premium model
On Type S
Compact Spare Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
272
IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLOOCCAATTIIOONN MMAARRKK
TTRREEAADD WWEEAARR IINNDDIICCAATTOORR BBAARR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive
slowly along the shoulder until you
gettoanexitoranareatostopthat
is far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the car on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground away from
traffic. Put the transmission in
Park. Apply the parking brake.
Turn on the hazard warning lights
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the car while
you change the tire.
Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
floor lid by pulling up on the
handle. To keep the lid out of the
way, hook the handle on the upper
frame of the trunk opening.
The tools are in the tool box on
the right side of the trunk. Take
the tools out of the tool box.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
273
TTRRUUNNKK FFLLOOOORR
SSPPAARREE TTIIRREE TTOOOOLL BBOOXX
HHAANNDDLLEEHHAANNDDLLEE
JJAACCKK
The car can easily roll off the
jack, seriously injuring anyone
underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the car when it
is supported only by the jack.
Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2
turn with the wheel wrench.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
The jack is behind a cover in the
right fender. Remove the cover by
turning the handle counterclock-
wise, then pulling on the cover.
6. 7. 8.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
274
WWHHEEEELL WWRREENNCCHH
JJAACCKK
△
CONTINUED
Remove the wheel nuts and flat
tire. Temporarily place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface of the wheel facing up.
You could scratch the wheel if you
putitfacedown.
Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Locate the jacking point nearest
thetireyouneedtochange.Itis
pointed to by a mark molded
into the underside of the body.
Place the jack under the jacking
point. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
9. 10.
11.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
275
EEXXTTEENNSSIIOONN
JJAACCKKIINNGG PPOOIINNTT
WWHHEEEELL
WWRREENNCCHH
Lower the car to the ground and
remove the jack.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully,itmaybehotfrom
driving.
12.
13. 14.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
276
BBRRAAKKEE HHUUBB
CONTINUED
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
Place the flat tire face down in the
sparetirewell.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
16.
15. 17.
18.
19.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
277
CCEENNTTEERR CCAAPP
WWIINNGG BBOOLLTT SSPPAACCEERR CCOONNEE
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
orNeutralorthestarterwillnot
operate.
Your car has the Immobilizer
System. You should use a
properly-coded master or valet key
to start the engine (see page ).
A key that is not properly coded
will cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly.
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Replace the cover. Store the
tools.
Store the center cap in the trunk.
Make sure it does not get scratch-
ed or damaged.
Unhook the handle from the trunk
opening and lower the floor lid.
Close the trunk lid.
78
20.
21.
22.
23.
Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If Your Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
278
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack and tools
securely before driving.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
thefusesareOK,thereisproba-
bly something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. (See
on page .)
Do you have fuel? Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) for a
minute and watch the fuel gauge.
The low fuel level warning light
may not be working, so you were
not reminded to fill the tank.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page ). You can
then try jump starting the car from
a booster battery (see page ).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
280
295
236
280
175
289
295
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
Emergency
Towing
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
279
＋
＋
If your car’s battery has run down,
you may be able to start the engine
by using a booster battery. Although
this seems like a simple procedure,
you should take several precautions.
You cannot start your Acura by
pushing or pulling it.
To jump start your car, follow these
directions closely:
Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery
(see page ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: climate control, stereo
system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park and set the parking brake.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on the
booster battery. Connect the other
end to the positive ( ) terminal
on your Acura’s battery.
Remove the battery cover (see
page ).
1.
2.
3.
4.
236
236
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
280
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
−
Start your car. If the starter motor
still operates slowly, check the
jumper cable connections to make
sure they have good metal-to-
metal contact.
Once your car is running, discon-
nectthenegativecablefromyour
car, then from the booster battery.
Disconnect the positive cable from
your car, then the booster battery.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
5. 6. 7.
8.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Jump Starting
281
BBOOOOSSTTEERR BBAATTTTEERRYYPPrreemmiiuumm mmooddeell TTyyppee SS
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading
(climbing a long, steep hill on a
hot day with the A/C running, for
example), the engine should start
to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the tempera-
ture gauge comes down to the mid-
point then continue driving.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park and set the parking brake.
Turn off the climate control and all
other accessories. Turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
The pointer of your car’s tempera-
ture gauge should stay in the mid-
range under most conditions. It may
go higher if you are driving up a long
steep hill on a very hot day. If it
climbs to the red mark, you should
determine the reason.
Your car can overheat for several
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a
mechanical problem. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
1.
2.
3.
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
282
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Wait until you see no more signs
of steam or spray, then open the
hood.
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway
between the MIN and MAX marks.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may also have to
add coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. This
releases any remaining pressure in
the cooling system. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum (climate control to
FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add
coolant to the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair. (See
on page .)
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
12.
11.295
165
295
Emergency
Towing
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
283
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If the light
does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
continue driving. (See
on page .)
Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing, it
indicates that the oil pressure
dropped very low for a moment, then
recovered. If the indicator stays on
with the engine running, it shows
that the engine has lost oil pressure
and serious engine damage is
possible. In either case, you should
take immediate action.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Letthecarsitforaminute.Open
the hood and check the oil level
(see page ). Although oil level
and oil pressure are not directly
connected, an engine that is very
low on oil can lose pressure during
cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
295
163
217
Emergency
Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
284
LLOOWW OOIILL PPRREESSSSUURREE IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the car stopped.
By eliminating as much of the
electrical load as possible, you can
drive several miles (kilometers)
before the battery is too discharged
to keep the engine running. Drive to
a service station or garage where
you can get technical assistance.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories: radio, climate control,
rear defogger, cruise control, etc.
Try not to use other electrically-
operated controls such as the power
windows. Keep the engine running
and take extra care not to stall it.
Starting the engine will discharge
the battery rapidly.
This indicator should come on when
the ignition switch is ON (II), and go
out after the engine starts. If it
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, it indicates that the
charging system has stopped
charging the battery.
Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
285
CCHHAARRGGIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
If you have recently refueled your
car, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
and tighten it until it clicks several
times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is
missing. Tightening the cap will not
make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes three driving
trips.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates one of the
engine’s emissions control systems
may have a problem. Even though
you may feel no difference in your
car’s performance, it can reduce
your fuel economy and cause your
car to put out excessive emissions.
Continued operation may cause
serious damage.
If the indicator remains on past three
driving trips, or the fuel cap was not
loose or missing, have the car
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem.
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and
driving at high speed.
Youshouldalsohavethedealer
inspect your car if this indicator
comes on repeatedly, even though it
may turn off as you continue driving.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
286
MMAALLFFUUNNCCTTIIOONN IINNDDIICCAATTOORR LLAAMMPP
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your car’s emissions controls
and engine. Those repairs may not be
covered by your car’s warranties.
＊＊
＊＊
If you must drive the car a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and cautiously.
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the car’s
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on
the brake pedal to see if it feels
normal. If it does, check the brake
fluid level the next time you stop at a
service station (see page ). If the
fluid level is low, take the car to your
dealer and have the brake system
inspected for leaks or worn brake
pads.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the car. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See
on page .)
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. Because of the
brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
problem in one part of the system
will still give you braking at two
wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
go down much farther before the car
begins to slow down, and you will
have to press harder on the pedal.
The distance needed to stop will be
much longer.
The Brake System Indicator comes
on when you turn the ignition ON
(II). If the parking brake is not set, it
goes off after you start the engine. If
the parking brake is set, it goes off
when you fully release the parking
brake with the engine running.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with this
indicator, have the car inspected by
your dealer immediately.
229
295
On Type S
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Emergency
Towing
287
UU..SS.. iinnddiiccaattoorr sshhoowwnn
BBRRAAKKEE SSYYSSTTEEMM IINNDDIICCAATTOORR
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
Check the fuse for the moonroof
motor (see page ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
Try closing the moonroof. If the
new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually.
Insert the moonroof wrench into
the socket behind this plug. Turn
the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.
Get the moonroof wrench out of
the tool kit in the trunk.
Use a screwdriver or coin to
remove the round plug in the
center of the headliner.
Remove the wrench. Replace the
round plug.
1.
2.
3.
289
4. 5.
6.
Closing the Moonroof
Taking Care of the Unexpected
288
SSOOCCKKEETTRROOUUNNDD PPLLUUGG
All the electrical circuits in your car
have fuses to protect them from a
short circuit or overload. These
fuses are located in three fuse boxes.
Theinteriorfuseboxesarelocated
on each side of the dashboard. To
open an interior fuse box, open the
car door. Pull the bottom of the
cover open, then take it out of its
side hinges by pulling it toward you.
The VSA fuse box is located under
the interior fuse box on the
passenger’s side of the dashboard.
To open it, push the tab and pull up
theleftsideofthecoverasshown.
The under-hood fuse box is located
in the back of the engine compart-
ment on the passenger’s side. To
open it, push the tabs as shown.
On Type S
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
289
IINNTTEERRIIOORR
UUNNDDEERR--HHOOOODDVVSSAA FFUUSSEE BBOOXX TTAABB
−
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screw-
driver.Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
If something electrical in your car
stops working, the first thing you
should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
, or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check the component’s
operation.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
3.
1.
2.
4.
292 294
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
290
BBLLOOWWNN
FFUUSSEE
PPUULLLLEERR
FFUUSSEE
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your car.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your car checked
by a qualified mechanic.
If you cannot drive the car without
fixing the problem, and you do not
have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the
same rating or a lower rating from
one of the other circuits. Make sure
youcandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
).
5.
6.
157
CONTINUED
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
291
BBLLOOWWNN
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a replace-
ment f use with the proper rating f or the
circuit, install one with a lower rating.
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
−
＊
＊
Amps. Circuits ProtectedNo. No. Amps. Circuits Protected
20 A
30 A
7.5 A
60 A
40 A
40 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
Condenser Fan
Condenser Fan
MG Clutch
IG1 Main
Rear Window Defogger
Heater Motor
TCS
VSA
Power Seat
Power Window Motor
Back Up, ACC
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
20 A
30 A
120 A
30 A
20 A
15 A
30 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan
Battery
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Hazard
ABS Motor
ACG S
Stop
ABS F/S Relay
Right Headlight
Not Used
Left Headlight
1:
2:
Premium model
Type S
1
2
1
2
1
2
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
292
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
＊
＊
−
−
←← →→
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Circuits ProtectedAmps.No. Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.
Fuel Pump
Main SRS
Heater Control, A/C Clutch
Relay, Cooling Fan Relay
Mirror, Heated Seat, Heated
Mirror
Daytime Running Lights
ECU(PCM),CruiseControl,
VSA
Side SRS
ACC Relay, Navigation
Instrument Panel, Back-up
Lights, Memory Seat
Turn Signals
IG Coil
Wiper, Washer
Starter Signal
On Canadian models
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
30 A
7.5 A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Moonroof Motor
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining, Memory Seat
Heated Seat
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding,
Memory Seat
Not Used
Right Power Window
Radio, Power Outlet
Navigation System, Daytime
Running Lights
Interior Light, Seat Memory,
HomeLink
Power Door Locks
Clock, Back Up, Small Light
ABS Motor Check
Driver’s Power Window
Not Used
On Canadian models
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
30 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
:
:
Passenger’s Power Seat Sliding
Passenger’s Power Seat Reclining
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
293
FFrroonntt FFrroonntt
INTERIOR FUSE BOXES
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
−
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1
2
3
20 A
20 A
VSA F/S Relay
VSA Throttle Motor
Not Used
On Type S
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
294
VSA FUSE BOX
−
−
−
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
If your car needs to be towed, call a
professional towing service or, if you
belong to one, an organization that
provides roadside assistance. Never
tow your car behind another vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
The operator
loads your car on the back of a truck.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground.
The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
the cables lift that end of the car off
the ground. Your car’s suspension
and body can be seriously damaged.
If your Acura cannot be transported
by flat-bed, it should be towed by
wheel-lift equipment with the front
wheels off the ground. If, due to
damage, your car must be towed
with the front wheels on the ground,
do the following.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the car no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speedbelow35mph(55km/h).
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
ShifttoD,thentoN.
Turn off the engine.
5
CONTINUED
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lift Equipment
Sling-type Equipment
This is the best way to transport
your Acura.
This is
an acceptable way to tow your
Acura.
This method of towing is
unacceptable.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
295
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine, your car must be transported
with the f ront wheels of f the ground.
If you decide to tow your car with all
four wheels on the ground, make
sure you use a properly-designed and
attached tow bar. Prepare the car for
towing as described above, and leave
the ignition switch in Accessory (I)
so the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
socket are turned off so they do not
rundownthebattery.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
296
Trying to lif t or tow your car by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the car’s weight.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
f reely bef ore you begin towing.
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Acura, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 298
................................Specifications . 300
DOT Tire Quality Grading
.............................(U.S.Cars) .302
.................................Treadwear . 302
......................................Traction . 302
.............................Temperature . 303
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 304
......Driving in Foreign Countries . 305
.......................Emissions Controls . 306
.....................The Clean Air Act . 306
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 306
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 306
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 306
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 307
....................PGM-FI System . 307
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 307
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 307
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 307
....................Replacement Parts . 307
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 308
Technical Information
Technical Information
297
Your car has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Acura dealer uses to register your
car for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your car. The easiest place to find
the VIN is on a plate fastened to the
top of the dashboard. You can see it
by looking through the windshield
on the driver’s side. It is also on the
Certification label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on
the engine compartment bulkhead.
The VIN is also provided in bar code
on the Certification label.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
298
VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR
CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN LLAABBEELL
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front
left.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
300
EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR
TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Technical Information
Specifications
301
Dimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Capacities
4.2 US qt (4.0
, 3.5 Imp qt)
192.0 in (4,877 mm)
70.4 in (1,789 mm)
55.5 in (1,409 mm)
106.9 in (2,715 mm)
61.1 in (1,553 mm)
61.0 in (1,549 mm)
HFC-134a (R-134a)
21.2 22.9 oz (600 650 g)
ND-OIL8
1.48 US gal (5.6 , 1.23 Imp gal)
1.98 US gal (7.5
, 1.65 Imp gal)
4.6 US qt (4.4
, 3.9 Imp qt)
5.3 US qt (5.0 , 4.4 Imp qt)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
3.1 US qt (2.9
, 2.6 Imp qt)
7.6 US qt (7.2
, 6.3 Imp qt)
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)
4.8 US qt (4.5
, 4.0 Imp qt)
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6
, 0.13 Imp gal)
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
1:
2:
Approx.
Front
Rear
Change
Total
Change
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Cars
Canada Cars
17.17 US gal (65.0 , 14.30 Imp gal)
1
2
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Technical Information
Specifications
302
Fuses
Battery
Engine
Tires
Alignment
Lights
12 V
12 V
60 W (HB3)
24/2.2 CP
12 V
12 V
21 W
21/5 W
Interior
Under-hood
Capacity 12 V 65 AH/20 HR
See page 292 or the fuse box
cover.
See pages 293 and 294 or the fuse
label attached to the inside of the
fuse box door on each side of the
dashboard.
12 V 1.1 W
2CP12 V
5W12 V
7W12 V
3CP
21 W
12 V
12 V
5W
21 W
12 V
12 V
6CP(5W)12 V
12 V
12 V
5W
21/5 W
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6)
gasoline engine
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs See spark plug maintenance
section page 235 .
196 cu-in (3,210 cm
)
3.50 x 3.39 in (89.0 x 86.0 mm)
9.8 : 1
10.5 : 1
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Size
Pressure
Toe
Camber
Caster
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
T135/80R16 101M
P215/50R17 93V
P205/60R16 91V
2°50’
0°30’
0°
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
12 V 2 CP
Headlights
Front turn signal/parking lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights
Stop/tail/side marker lights
Road lamps
High-mount brake light
Front side marker lights
Back-up lights
License plate light
Ceiling light
Spotlights
Trunk light
Door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror light
Glove box light
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
in
Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube
(D2R).
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
Premium model
Type S
Premium model
Type S
1:
2:
1:
2:
1
1
1
2
1
2
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The tires on your car meet all U.S.
Federal Safety Requirements. All
tires are also graded for treadwear,
traction, and temperature perform-
ance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards.
The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Treadwear Traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)
Technical Information
303
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Temperature
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)
Technical Information
303
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
informationtobepostedonthe
pump.
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
(ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.
(methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
MTBE
ETHANOL
METHANOL
Oxygenated Fuels
Technical Information
304
If you are planning to take your
Acura outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Acura will affect perfor-
mance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your car back into
compliance will require the replace-
ment of several components, such as
theoxygensensorsandthethree
way catalytic converter. These re-
placements are not covered under
warranty.
Driving in Foreign Countries
Technical Information
305
＊
＊
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
In Canada, Acura vehicles comply
with the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (CMVSS) for
Emissions valid at the time they are
manufactured.
The burning of gasoline in your car’s
engine produces several byproducts.
Some of these are carbon monoxide
(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and
hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline
evaporating from the tank also
produces hydrocarbons. Controlling
the production of NOx, CO, and HC
is important to the environment.
Under certain conditions of sunlight
and climate, NOx and HC react to
form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon
monoxide does not contribute to
smog creation, but it is a poisonous
gas.
Your car has a Positive Crankcase
Ventilation System. This keeps
gasses that build up in the engine’s
crankcase from going into the
atmosphere. The Positive Crankcase
Ventilation valve routes them from
the crankcase back to the intake
manifold. They are then drawn into
the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
208
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
306
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust
Gas Recirculation and Three Way
Catalytic Converter. These four
systems work together to control the
engine’s combustion and minimize
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operat-
ing conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO and NOx produced.
The Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) system takes some of the
exhaust gas and routes it back into
the intake manifold. Adding exhaust
gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces
the amount of NOx produced when
the fuel is burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Genuine Acura replacement parts or
their equivalent for repairs. Using
lower quality parts may increase the
emissions from your car.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your car. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
307
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Acura part
or its equivalent.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any com-
bustible materials that come near it.
Park your car away from high grass,
dry leaves, or other flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your car’s three way catalytic
converter.
Have your car diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
308
TTHHRREEEE WWAAYY CCAATTAALLYYTTIICC CCOONNVVEERRTTEERR
Customer Relations
................................Information . 310
.............Canada Zone Office Map . 311
....................Warranty Coverages . 312
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 313
.....................Authorized Manuals . 315
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
309
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact the Acura
Customer Relations Office.
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Acura dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
U.S. Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
(787) 250-4327
Refer to the Canadian Zone Office
Map on the next page.
Canadian Owners:
Acura Automobile Division
Client Services Office
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
or telephone: (800) 382-2238
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your car
Date of purchase
Mileage on your car
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
car to you
298
Customer Relations Information
Warranty and Customer Relations
310
Canada Zone Office Map
Warranty and Customer Relations
311
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
Honda Canada Inc.
National Office
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered for the useful life of the
vehicle.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Your new Acura is covered by these
warranties:
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from an Acura dealer.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s emis-
sions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
covers all Genuine
Acura replacement parts against
defects in materials and workman-
ship.
Genuine Acura Accessories are
covered under this warranty. Time
and mileage limits depend on the
type of accessory and other factors.
Please read your warranty manual
for details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2001 Acura Warranty Information
booklet that came with your car for
precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Acura’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2001 Warranty
Manual that came with your car.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
312
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying Acura Automobile
Division, American Honda Motor Co.,
Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Acura
Automobile Division, American
Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Warranty and Customer Relations
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
313
314
＊
＊
＊
−
＊
２
０
０
１
Ａ
Ｃ
Ｕ
The following publications covering the operation and
servicing of your vehicle can be obtained from Helm
Incorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,
for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone number
on the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,
contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,
Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Acura dealer.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
315
Publication
Form Number
61S3M00
61S3M00EL
61S3M30
31S3M600
31S3M700
ACU-R
Form Description
2001 Acura 3.2 CL
Service Manual
2001 Acura 3.2 CL
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2001 Acura 3.2 CL
Body Repair Manual
2001 Acura 3.2 CL
Owner’s Manual
2001 Acura 3.2 CL
Navigation Manual
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Price
Each
$62.00
$42.00
$40.00
$32.00
$27.00
FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.00
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
316
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
CONTINUED
...Accessories and Modifications . 167
................................Accessories . 167
.Additional Safety Precautions . 168
............................Modifications . 168
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 80
............Accessory Power Sockets . 117
Adding
Automatic Transmission
.......................................Fluid . 228
................................Brake Fluid . 229
..........................Engine Coolant . 221
..................................Engine Oil . 217
................Power Steering Fluid . 230
........Windshield Washer Fluid . 227
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 48
...Additional Safety Precautions . 48
.............................Airbag Service . 48
Additional Information About
................Your Front Airbags . 43
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 45
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 43
........................SRS Components . 43
Additional Information About
.......................Your Seat Belts . 40
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 41
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 42
..Seat Belt System Components . 40
Additional Information About
...................Your Side Airbags . 46
How The Side Airbag Indicator
............................Light Works . 47
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 46
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 218
Adjustments
..........................Head Restraints . 98
.......................................Mirrors . 101
.............................................Seats . 94
...........................Steering Wheel . 71
.........................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 43, 46
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 231
.................Air Conditioning Filter . 242
..............Air Conditioning System . 122
..............................Maintenance . 241
.................................Usage . 124, 129
.......................Air Outlets (Vents) . 122
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 244
...........................Alarm, Anti-theft . 157
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 304
.......Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . 265
......................................Antifreeze . 221
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
....................Indicator Light . 55, 187
...................................Operation . 186
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 157
Anti-theft Steering Column
..............................................Lock . 80
..........................Anti-theft System . 158
..........................Appearance Care . 263
............................................Armrest . 99
...............Audio Controls, Remote . 156
................................Audio System . 135
Automatic Climate Control
........................................System . 122
...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 66
Automatic Seat Belt
...................................Tensioners . 41
...............Automatic Speed Control . 73
Index
A
I
..............Automatic Transmission . 176
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 300
...............Checking Fluid Level . 228
....Sequential SportShift Mode . 179
.......................................Shifting . 176
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 176
................Shift Lever Positions . 177
....................Shift Lock Release . 183
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 55, 285
............................Jump Starting . 280
..............................Maintenance . 236
............................Specifications . 301
..............................Before Driving . 159
....................................Belts,Seat .8,40
...........................Beverage Holder . 112
...................................Body Repair . 270
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 186
.............Break-in, New Linings . 160
...........................................Fluid . 229
.....................Light, Burned-out . 256
.......................................Parking . 110
.................System Indicator . 55, 287
........................Wear Indicators . 185
Brakes, ABS
...................................Operation . 186
.................System Indicator . 55, 187
.............................Braking System . 185
........................Break-in, New Car . 160
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 67
........................Brights, Headlights . 65
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 256
..............................Brake Lights . 256
........Front Side Marker Lights . 255
.................................Headlights . 252
.........High-mount Brake Light . 257
...........................Interior Lights . 258
...................License Plate Light . 258
...............................Road Lamps . 254
............................Specifications . 301
...............................Trunk Light . 260
....................Turn Signal Lights . 255
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 252
.........Cables, Jump Starting With . 280
..................................Cancel Button . 75
............................Capacities Chart . 300
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 49
............................Carrying, Cargo . 169
Cassette Player
............................................Care . 146
...................................Operation . 142
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
...................................CD Changer . 147
..................................Ceiling Light . 118
........................Certification Label . 298
............................................Chains . 249
Change Oil
........................................How to . 219
......................................When to . 208
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 273
............Changing Engine Coolant . 223
...Charging System Indicator . 55, 285
Checking
Automatic Transmission
.......................................Fluid . 228
.....................Battery Condition . 236
................................Brake Fluid . 229
Index
C
B
II
＊
CONTINUED
.................................Drive Belts . 242
..........................Engine Coolant . 165
..................................Engine Oil . 163
..........................................Fuses . 290
................Power Steering Fluid . 230
............Checklist, Before Driving . 174
...................................Cleaner, Air . 231
Cleaning
....................Aluminum Wheels . 265
...................................Carpeting . 266
......................................Exterior . 264
.........................................Fabric . 267
.......................................Interior . 266
.......................................Leather . 267
...................................Seat Belts . 267
...........................................Vinyl . 267
....................................Windows . 268
................................Wood Trim . 268
...............Climate Control System . 122
.........................Clock, Setting the . 110
......................................Coat Hook . 115
.....................Code, Audio System . 157
........................CO in the Exhaust . 306
........................................Coin Box . 113
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 175
..............................Compact Spare . 272
.................Console Compartment . 113
.............................Console Pocket . 114
...............Consumer Information . 310
.............Controls, Instruments and . 51
Coolant
........................................Adding . 221
....................................Checking . 165
.........................Proper Solution . 221
...................................Replacing . 223
...................Temperature Gauge . 62
....................Corrosion Protection . 269
............................Courtesy Lights . 119
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 306
..............Cruise Control Operation . 73
..........Customer Relations Office . 310
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 2, 52
................Daytime Running Lights . 67
...........Dead Battery, What to Do . 280
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 313
................Defogger, Rear Window . 70
......Defrosting the Windows . 128, 133
DEXRON
III Automatic
...................Transmission Fluid . 228
....................................Dimensions . 300
...............Dimming the Headlights . 65
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 228
..................................Engine Oil . 163
..........................Directional Signals . 67
.....Disabled, Towing Your Car If . 295
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 185
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 220
Doors
....................Lockout Prevention . 82
..............................Monitor Light . 58
......................Power Door Locks . 81
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 302
.....................................Drive Belts . 242
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 173
....................................Economy . 166
.........................In Bad Weather . 194
................In Foreign Countries . 305
Driving Position Memory
........................................System . 103
Index
D
III
..............................Economy, Fuel . 166
............Emergencies on the Road . 271
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 280
...........Brake System Indicator . 287
................Changing a Flat Tire . 273
.....Charging System Indicator . 285
..................Checking the Fuses . 290
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 284
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 286
...Manually Closing Moonroof . 288
..................Overheated Engine . 282
.........................Emergency Brake . 110
......................Emergency Flashers . 70
......................Emergency Towing . 295
.......................Emissions Controls . 306
Engine
............................................Belts . 242
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 62
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 55, 286
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 55, 284
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 217
...............................Overheating . 282
............................Specifications . 301
............................Speed Limiter . 182
...................Engine Speed Limiter . 182
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 304
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 306
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 49
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
........................................System . 307
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 18
..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 264
..........................Fan, Interior . 126, 131
Features, Comfort and
..............................Convenience . 121
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 161
Filters
................................Air Cleaner . 231
.......................Air Conditioning . 242
...............................................Oil . 219
.......................First Gear, Shifting . 182
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 70
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 273
.....................................Floor Mats . 266
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 228
..........................................Brake . 229
..........................Power Steering . 230
..................Windshield Washer . 227
FM Stereo Radio
...........................Reception . 136, 140
.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 305
..........................Four-way Flashers . 70
..............................Front Airbags . 9, 43
Front End, Towing by
................Emergency Wrecker . 295
.................................................Fuel . 160
......................Fill Door and Cap . 161
...........................................Gauge . 62
................Octane Requirement . 160
...............................Oxygenated . 304
........................Reserve Indicator . 59
........................Tank, Filling the . 161
..............Fuel Mileage, Improving . 166
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 289
Index
F
E
IV
CONTINUED
..........................................Gasohol . 304
.........................................Gasoline . 160
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 59
...........................................Gauge . 62
................Octane Requirement . 160
........................Tank, Filling the . 161
................Gas Station Procedures . 161
.............................................Gauges . 60
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 62
...............................................Fuel . 62
Maintenance Required
...................................Indicator . 63
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 197
............Gearshift Lever Positions . 177
..............................Glass Cleaning . 268
........................................Glove Box . 88
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 197
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 252
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 70
Headlights
Automatic Lighting Off
.....................................Feature . 66
............Daytime Running Lights . 67
..................High Beam Indicator . 58
...........High Beams, Turning on . 65
............Low Beams, Turning on . 65
.........................Reminder Chime . 65
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 252
...................................Turning on . 65
..............................Head Restraints . 98
.....................Heating and Cooling . 122
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 175
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 65
..............High-mount Brake Light . 257
HomeLink Universal
.................................Transmitter . 89
....................................Hood Latch . 231
.......................Hood, Opening the . 162
..................................................Horn . 64
.......Hot Coolant, Warning about . 221
.................................Hydroplaning . 195
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 298
......If Your Car Has to be Towed . 295
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 77
...........................................Switch . 79
............Timing Control System . 307
........................Immobilizer System . 78
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
Indicator Lights, Instrument
.............................................Panel . 53
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 243
.................................Inside Mirror . 101
.............................Inspection, Tire . 245
............................Instrument Panel . 53
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 67
...........................Interior Cleaning . 266
........................................Introduction . i
Index
IHG
V
........................Jacking up the Car . 275
.......................................Jack, Tire . 274
................................Jump Starting . 280
..................................................Keys . 77
..................................Maintenance . 203
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 215
.................................Record . 213-214
......................Required Indicator . 63
..........................................Safety . 204
.............................Schedule . 208-212
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 55, 286
...........Memory, Driving Position . 103
...............................Meters, Gauges . 60
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 304
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 101
.......................................Moonroof . 109
......................Closing Manually . 288
...................................Operation . 109
...................Neutral Gear Position . 179
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 160
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 298
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 160
.........................................Odometer . 61
...............................Odometer, Trip . 61
Oil
........................Change, How to . 219
......................Change, When to . 208
......................Checking Engine . 163
..............Pressure Indicator . 55, 284
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 218
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 80
.......................Label, Certification . 298
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 67
..........................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40
.........Leaking of Exhaust into Car . 49
.........................Leather, Cleaning . 267
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 252
........................................Ceiling . 118
.....................................Courtesy . 119
.......................................Indicator . 53
.........................................Parking . 65
..................................Turn Signal . 67
.....................................Load Limit . 170
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 80
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 80
............................Fuel Fill Door . 161
....................................Glove Box . 88
.................................Power Door . 81
......Rear Console Compartment . 88
...........................................Trunk . 86
......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 100
........................Low Coolant Level . 165
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 59
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 55, 284
Lubricant Specifications
..........................................Chart . 300
.........................................Luggage . 169
Index
M
N
O
L
J
K
VI
CONTINUED
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 306
........................Opening the Hood . 162
.........................Opening the Trunk . 86
..Operation in Foreign Countries . 305
............................Outside Mirrors . 101
....Outside Temperature Indicator . 62
....................Overheating, Engine . 282
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 215
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 304
..............................Paint Touch-up . 265
..............Panel Brightness Control . 67
........................Park Gear Position . 178
...........................................Parking . 184
...............................Parking Brake . 110
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 55, 287
.................................Parking Lights . 65
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 308
.............................PGM-FI System . 307
..................Polishing and Waxing . 265
Power
..................................Door Locks . 81
.......................................Mirrors . 101
...............................Seat Controls . 94
......................................Steering . 230
....................................Windows . 107
............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18
............................Protecting Adults . 12
...Additional Safety Precautions . 19
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
........................Protecting Children . 20
.......................Protecting Infants . 28
.......Protecting Larger Children . 35
.........Protecting Small Children . 32
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 39
...................Radiator Overheating . 282
...Radio/Cassette Sound System . 135
..........Rear Console Compartment . 88
..........................Rear End Towing . 295
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 256
............................Rear Seat Access . 97
..........................Rear Seat Armrest . 99
..........................Rear View Mirror . 101
.................Rear Window Defogger . 70
...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 95
.............................Reminder Lights . 53
.......................Remote Transmitter . 82
Replacement Information
.................Air Cleaner Element . 231
.............Air Conditioning Filter . 242
..........................Engine Coolant . 223
................Engine Oil and Filter . 219
..........................................Fuses . 290
................................Light Bulbs . 252
....................................Schedule . 206
................................Spark Plugs . 233
...........................................Tires . 247
.............................Wiper Blades . 239
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 42
...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 165
..................Reverse Gear Position . 178
.....................................Road Lamps . 65
................................Rotation, Tire . 246
Index
R
P
VII
＊
＊
........................................Safety Belts . 8
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 313
.................................Safety Features . 7
...........................................Airbags . 9
..................................Door Locks . 10
..........................Head Restraints . 10
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 10
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 50
...............................Safety Messages . ii
Seat Belt, Additional
..............................Information . 40
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 41
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 42
..Seat Belt System Components . 40
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 40
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18
.............Child Seat Anchor Plate . 39
.....................................Cleaning . 267
................................Maintenance . 42
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 40, 54
................................Replacement . 42
...................System Components . 40
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 39
...............Use During Pregnancy . 18
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15
..................................Seat Heaters . 106
..................Seat Position Memory . 103
........................Seats, Adjusting the . 94
................Security Alarm System . 158
...............................Serial Number . 298
...........................Service Intervals . 208
...........................Service Manual . 315
.........Service Station Procedures . 161
..........................Setting the Clock . 110
Shifting the Automatic
.............................Transmission . 176
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 176
........................Shift Lock Release . 183
....................................Side Airbags . 46
How The Side Airbag Indicator
............................Light Works . 47
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 46
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
.........................Replacement in . 255
...............................Signaling Turns . 67
.....................................Snow Tires . 249
...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 264
................................Sound System . 135
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 272
............................Specifications . 301
................Spark Plugs, Replacing . 233
....................Specifications Charts . 300
..................................Speed Control . 73
...................................Speedometer . 60
.......................................Spotlights . 118
....SRS, Additional Information . 43, 46
...Additional Safety Precautions . 48
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 41
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 45
.....How Your Airbags Work . 43, 46
........................SRS Components . 43
..................................SRS Service . 48
.............................SRS Indicator . 45, 56
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 80
.......................Starting the Engine . 175
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 175
................With a Dead Battery . 280
........Steam Coming from Engine . 282
Index
S
VIII
CONTINUED
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 71
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 80
...................Stereo Sound System . 135
...........................Storing Your Car . 261
..................................Storage Tray . 115
........................................Sun Visor . 116
........................Sunglasses Holder . 111
Supplemental Restraint
............................System . 9, 43, 46
....................Service Precautions . 48
......................................Servicing . 48
.........................SRS Indicator . 45, 56
...................System Components . 43
...............Tensioners, Seat Belts . 41
..................................Synthetic Oil . 218
.....................................Tachometer . 60
......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 256
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 271
....................................Tape Player . 142
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 302
..Driving in Foreign Countries . 305
.....Emissions Control Systems . 306
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 304
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 308
.......................Temperature Gauge . 62
...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 41
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 39
...............Theft Deterrent System . 158
............................Theft Protection . 157
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 308
..........................Time, Setting the . 110
....................................Timing Belt . 243
....................................Tire Chains . 249
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 273
...............................................Tires . 243
..............................Air Pressure . 244
...................................Balancing . 246
.........................Checking Wear . 245
..........................Compact Spare . 272
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 302
......................................Inflation . 243
..................................Inspection . 245
..............................Maintenance . 246
...................................Replacing . 247
......................................Rotating . 246
...........................................Snow . 249
............................Specifications . 301
.......................Traction Devices . 249
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 273
...............................Torn Seat Belts . 42
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 196
..........By Emergency Wrecker . 295
Traction Control System (TCS)
...............................Indicator . 57, 190
...................................Operation . 188
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
..............................Automatic . 228
...........................Fluid Selection . 228
..............Identification Number . 299
.............Shifting the Automatic . 176
.....................................Treadwear . 302
.......................................Trip Meter . 61
................................................Trunk . 86
.................................Opening the . 86
...................Open Monitor Light . 58
....................................Turn Signals . 67
Index
T
IX
＊
＊
.....................Underside, Cleaning . 269
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 271
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 302
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 160
.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 267
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 220
................................Vanity Mirror . 116
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 170
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 300
....Vehicle Identification Number . 298
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
....................................System . 191
........VSA System Indicator . 57, 192
...VSA Activation Indicator . 57, 191
.........................VSA Off Switch . 192
.............................Vehicle Storage . 261
.....................................Ventilation . 122
.................................................VIN . 298
...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 267
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 218
Warning Beepers
..............................Headlights on . 65
.............................Key in Ignition . 80
...............................Seat Belts . 40, 54
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 50
..................Warranty Coverages . 312
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 227
.....................................Operation . 69
.........................................Washing . 264
..................Waxing and Polishing . 265
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 71
............Alignment and Balance . 246
......Cleaning Aluminum Alloys . 265
..........................Compact Spare . 272
......................................Wrench . 274
Windows
.....................................Cleaning . 268
................Operating the Power . 107
...........................Rear, Defogger . 70
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 68
...........................Defroster . 128, 133
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 239
.....................................Operation . 68
....................................Wood Trim . 268
....................................Worn Tires . 245
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 295
U.S. and Canada only
Index
W
V
U
X
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
SpareTirePressure:
Power Steering Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher.
API Service SJ ‘‘Energy
Conserving’’ oil, SAE 5W-30
viscosity (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
Front/Rear:Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Honda Premium Formula
Automatic Transmission Fluid
preferred, or a DEXRON
III ATF
as a temporary replacement (see
page ).
4.6 US qt (4.4
, 3.9 Imp qt)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
217
228
230
229
17.17 US gal (65.0 , 14.30 Imp gal)
